Flujometro Coriolis Tipo U V2

Ins. No.
L-740-28-E
ALTI mass
■ Type U/Sophisticated models: CA00A, CA001, CA003, CA006, CA010, CA015
CA025, CA040, CA050, CA080, CA100, CA150
CA15H, CA200, CA20H, CA250
■ Type S/Straight tube models: CS010, CS015, CS025, CS040, CS050, CS080
CSR50
■ Type B/Low price, general purpose models:
CB006, CB010, CB015, CB025, CB040, CB050
■ Transmitter : PA0K
Type U Type S Type B
Type U Type U Type U Separately mounted

Extra low flows Low flows Large size transmitter
Every OVAL product is fabricated, tested, and inspected under stringent quality control before it
leaves our factory.
To derive maximum benefit from the product, we recommend you to be well familiar with the
information and instructions given in this manual before you place it in service and retain this
manual at the field location for ready reference.
1
L--740--28--E
CONTENTS
1. BEFORE YOU BEGIN ............................................................................................................ 5
1.1 Confirming the Tag Information ............................................................................................. 5
1.2 Transportation Guidelines ..................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Storage Guidelines ................................................................................................................ 5
1.4 Precautions for Operating Conditions ................................................................................... 6
1.5 Precautions for Installation Location ..................................................................................... 6
1.6 Precautions for power-on ...................................................................................................... 6
1.7 Returning Equipment ............................................................................................................. 6
2. GENERAL AND FEATURES ................................................................................................ 7
2.1 General Description ............................................................................................................... 7
2.2 Features ................................................................................................................................ 7
3. SPECIFICATIONS AND PERFORMANCE ........................................................................ 7
3.1 Sensor Unit General Specifications ........................................................................................ 7
3.1.1 Type U sensor unit general specifications ....................................................................... 7
3.1.2 Type S sensor unit general specifications ..................................................................... 11
3.1.3 Type B sensor unit general specifications ..................................................................... 11
3.1.4 Transmitter general specifications .................................................................................. 12
3.1.5 Max. operating temperature of PED specification .......................................................... 12
3.2 General Performance ........................................................................................................... 13
3.2.1 Type U general performance .......................................................................................... 13
3.2.2 Type S general performance ........................................................................................... 16
3.2.3 Type B general performance ........................................................................................... 16
3.3 Display .................................................................................................................................. 17
4. PRESSURE LOSSES ............................................................................................................ 17
4.1 Type U Pressure Losses ...................................................................................................... 17
4.2 Type S Pressure Losses........................................................................................................ 19
4.3 Type B Pressure Losses........................................................................................................ 20
5. PART NAMES AND OUTLINE DIMENSIONS .................................................................. 21
5.1 Type U ................................................................................................................................... 21
5.1.1 CA00A, CA001 and CA003 (separately mounted models).............................................. 21
5.1.2 CA006 thru CA080 (integrally mounted models) ............................................................. 22
5.1.3 CA100 thru CA250 (integrally mounted models) ............................................................. 24
5.1.4 CA006 thru CA080 (separately mounted models) ........................................................... 25
5.1.5 CA100 thru CA250 (separately mounted models) ........................................................... 27
5.1.6 High temperature service models (CA025 to CA150) ..................................................... 28
5.1.7 Low temperature explosionproof service models (CA025 to CA080) .............................. 29
5.1.8 Low temperature explosionproof service models (CA100 to CA250) .............................. 30
5.1.9 Ferrule fitting type (integrally and separately mounted models,
low temperature explosionproof service models) ............................. 34
5.2 Type S ................................................................................................................................... 33
5.2.1 Stainless steel tube type (integrally and separately mounted models)............................ 33
5.2.2 Titanium tube type (integrally and separately mounted models) ..................................... 34
5.2.3 Ferrule fitting type (integrally and separately mounted models) ...................................... 35
5.3 Type B ................................................................................................................................... 36
5.3.1 Integrally mounted models ............................................................................................. 36
5.3.2 Separately mounted models ........................................................................................... 37
5.4 Separately Mounted Transmitter ........................................................................................... 38
6. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................... 38
6.1 Installation Guidelines .......................................................................................................... 38
6.2 Physical Orientation .............................................................................................................. 39
6.2.1 Type U physical orientation ............................................................................................ 39
6.2.2 Type S physical orientation.............................................................................................. 40
6.2.3 Type B physical orientation.............................................................................................. 41
6.3 Installation Location ............................................................................................................... 42
6.4 Installation Guidelines ........................................................................................................... 43
6.4.1 Standard piping conditions .............................................................................................. 43
6.4.2 Influence of vibration and pulsation ................................................................................. 44
6.4.3 Prevention of cavitation ................................................................................................... 44
6.4.4 Prevention of excessive flows ......................................................................................... 44
6.4.5 Prevention of gas mixed flows ......................................................................................... 44
6.4.6 Keeping the sensor filled with process liquid ................................................................... 44
6.4.7 Bypass loop ..................................................................................................................... 45
6.5 Installation Guidelines .......................................................................................................... 46
6.5.1 Flange type ...................................................................................................................... 46
6.5.2 Sanitary fitting type ......................................................................................................... 47
6.5.3 Screw-in type ................................................................................................................... 47
6.6 Installing Proper Pipe Supports ............................................................................................. 48
6.6.1 Type U pipe supports....................................................................................................... 48
6.6.2 Type S pipe supports ....................................................................................................... 49
6.6.3 Type B pipe supports ....................................................................................................... 49
6.7 Heat and Cold Retention Procedures .................................................................................... 50
6.7.1 Type U ............................................................................................................................. 50
6.7.2 Type S ............................................................................................................................. 51
6.7.3 Type B ............................................................................................................................. 51

L--740--28--E
6.8 A Boss for Pressure Relief Device - Its Use　 ....................................................................... 52

6.9 Separately Mounted Transmitter Installation ......................................................................... 52
6.10 How to Change Transmitter Orientation .............................................................................. 52
6.11 How to Change Transmitter Display Orientation.................................................................. 54
7. WIRING INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................................................... 57
7.1 Wiring Connections ............................................................................................................... 57
7.1.1 Power and output signal connections (both integrally and separately mounted models) .... 57
7.1.2 Connections between separately mounted sensor unit and transmitter .......................... 58
7.2 Power Supply Lines and Ground Terminal ............................................................................ 58
7.3 Analog Output Wiring ............................................................................................................ 58
7.4 Pulse Output Wiring .............................................................................................................. 59
7.5 Status Output Wiring ............................................................................................................. 59
7.6 Status Input Wiring ................................................................................................................ 60
7.7 Communication Line Wiring (option) ..................................................................................... 60
7.8 Recommended Cables condition ......................................................................................... 60
7.9 Terminal Identification of Separately Mounted Transmitter.................................................... 61
7.10 Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................................... 62
7.10.1 Transmitter power and output signal wiring ................................................................... 62
7.10.2 Separately mounted sensor unit and transmitter wiring ................................................ 63
7.11 How to Change Cable Entry Orientation of Terminal Box (Separately Mounted Type) ....... 64
8. OPERATION ........................................................................................................................... 66
8.1 Flushing the Piping Assembly ............................................................................................... 66
8.2 Confirming the Sensor Unit for Correct Installation ............................................................... 66
8.3 Leak Check ........................................................................................................................... 66
8.4 Supplying the Power ............................................................................................................. 66
8.5 Measurement Line Startup .................................................................................................... 66
8.6 Warm-up ............................................................................................................................... 66
8.7 Zeroing Procedure ................................................................................................................. 66
8.8 Readying for Operation ......................................................................................................... 66
9. DESCRIPTION OF INCORPORATED FUNCTIONS ....................................................... 67
9.1 Display ................................................................................................................................... 67
9.1.1 Description of display ..................................................................................................... 67
9.1.2 Switch operation .............................................................................................................. 68
9.1.3 Viewing the variables...................................................................................................... 69
9.2 Viewing the Parameters and Description .............................................................................. 71
9.2.1 Viewing the setup menu .................................................................................................. 71
9.2.2 Transition chart of view (1) .............................................................................................. 72
9.3 Parameter Value Entry .......................................................................................................... 84
9.4 Parameter Selection .............................................................................................................. 85
9.5 Password Function ................................................................................................................ 86
9.5.1 Password function setup ................................................................................................. 86
9.6 Self-diagnostic Capabilities ................................................................................................... 87
9.6.1 Probe check..................................................................................................................... 87
9.6.2 Drive coil check ............................................................................................................... 88
9.6.3 Transmitter check ............................................................................................................ 89
9.6.4 Pipeline vibration check (at zero flow) ............................................................................. 90
9.6.5 Pipeline oscillation check (at normal flow) ....................................................................... 91
9.7 Simulated Signal Input/Output Capabilities ........................................................................... 92
9.7.1 Analog output .................................................................................................................. 92
9.7.2 Pulse output.................................................................................................................... 93
9.7.3 Status output ................................................................................................................... 94
9.7.4 Status input...................................................................................................................... 95
9.8 Zeroing Function ................................................................................................................... 96
9.8.1 Through LCD display switches ........................................................................................ 96
9.8.2 Through status input signal ............................................................................................. 97
9.8.3 Through Link Top communication .................................................................................... 97
9.9 Analog Trim Function ............................................................................................................. 98
9.10 Reset Function .................................................................................................................... 99
9.11 View Variables Screen Setup ............................................................................................ 100
9.12 Pulse Output Function ....................................................................................................... 101
9.12.1 Pulse output 1.............................................................................................................. 101
9.12.2 Pulse output 2.............................................................................................................. 101
9.12.3 Bidirectional pulse output .............................................................................................. 102
9.12.4 Double pulse input .......................................................................................................... 103
9.13 Analog Output Function ........................................................................................................ 104
9.14 Status Output Function ......................................................................................................... 105
9.14.1 Status output (Error Status) ............................................................................................ 105
9.14.2 Bidirectional flow direction output (Bi Direction) ............................................................. 105
9.14.3 H/L alarm output (H/L Alarm) .......................................................................................... 106

L--740--28--E
9.14.4 Drive output alarm (Used for maintenance purpose)................................................... 106

9.14.5 No assignment (No Function) ...................................................................................... 106
9.15 Status Input Function ........................................................................................................ 107
9.15.1 Pulse/analog output fixed at 0% (0% Sig Lock) .......................................................... 107
9.15.2 Zero adjustment (Auto Zero) ....................................................................................... 107
9.15.3 Totalizer 1 and totalizer 2 reset (Reset Total 1 and 2) ................................................. 107
9.15.4 Totalizer 1 reset (Reset Total 1) .................................................................................. 108
9.15.5 Totalizer 2 reset (Reset Total 2) .................................................................................. 108
9.16 High/Low Alarms Function ................................................................................................. 109
9.17 Gas Mixed Flow Alarm .......................................................................................................111
9.18 Setup Units List ................................................................................................................. 113
10. MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................. 114
10.1 Error Messages ................................................................................................................. 114
10.2 A List of Status Messages ................................................................................................. 115
10.3 Replacement Parts ............................................................................................................ 117
10.4 Explosionproof specification .............................................................................................. 117
10.4.1 TIIS explosionproof...................................................................................................... 117
10.4.2 ATEX/ IECEx explosionproof ....................................................................................... 118
10.4.3 KCs explosionproof ..................................................................................................... 119
10.4.4 CSA explosionproof ..................................................................................................... 120
10.4.5 EAC explosionproof ..................................................................................................... 122
10.4.6 NEPSI explosionproof ................................................................................................. 123
10.4.7 ITRI explosionproof ..................................................................................................... 124
10.4.8 Detector model specification table 1（TIIS Explosionproof）....................................... 125
10.4.9 Detector model specification table 2
（ATEX, IECEx, KCs, CSA, EAC, NEPSI, ITRI explosionproof） ................................. 126
10.4.10 Electric wire connection part of integral type / separate type converters........................ 127
10.4.11 Electric wire connection ports of separate type converter/ separate type detector ............. 132
10.5 Ambient Temperature (Type U).......................................................................................... 134
10.6 Precautions on the Explosionproof Specification .............................................................. 135
10.6.1 About the explosionproof ............................................................................................. 135
10.6.2 About cable gland ........................................................................................................ 135
10.6.3 About blanking plug ..................................................................................................... 136
10.6.4 Insulation performance ................................................................................................ 136
10.6.5 Earthing terminal ......................................................................................................... 136
10.6.6 About dedicated cable (for only separate type) ........................................................... 136
10.6.7 Maintenance and checking .......................................................................................... 137
11. EX-INFORMATION ............................................................................................................. 138
11.1 Nameplates........................................................................................................................ 138
11.2 Regarding FISCO System of FOUNDATION Fieldbus and PROFIBUS............................ 141
12. ABOUT MARITIME CERTIFICATION ............................................................................ 143
13. REGARDING EHEDG CERTIFICATION ....................................................................... 144
14. PRODUCT CODE EXPLANATION ................................................................................ 145
14.1 Type U .............................................................................................................................. 145
14.2 Type S .............................................................................................................................. 148
14.2.1 Stainless steel tube type.............................................................................................. 148
14.2.2 Titanium tube type ....................................................................................................... 150
14.3 Type B .............................................................................................................................. 152
15. PRODUCT CODE EXPLANATION OF THE OLD PRODUCT CODE ..................... 154
15.1 Type U product codes........................................................................................................ 154
15.1.1 CA00A to CA080 ......................................................................................................... 154
15.1.2 CA100 to CA250.......................................................................................................... 155
15.2 Type S product codes ........................................................................................................ 156
15.3 Type B product codes ........................................................................................................ 157
■ Shipping Parameters ................................................................................................................ 158
■ Safety Statement of Returned Goods ....................................................................................... 160
■ Repair Request Sheet............................................................................................................... 161
The signal words NOTE, CAUTION, and WARNING shown below are used throughout this manual
to draw your attention to specific items:
NOTE: Notes are separated from the general text to bring the user's attention to
important information.
CAUTION: Caution statements signal the user about hazards or unsafe practices which
could result in minor personal injury or product or property damage.
WARNING: Warning statements signal the user about hazards or unsafe practices which
could result in severe personal injury or death.

L--740--28--E
1. BEFORE YOU BIGIN

When you received, the sensor and transmitter should be thoroughly inspected for any sign of damage
in appearance by rough handling during transit. Necessary handling precautions are explained in this
section; read the instructions carefully.
For any inquiries, call the sales office from which you purchased the product, or contact
the nearest OVAL representative in our customer service network.
1.1 Confirming the Tag Information

Product code and major ratings appear on the nameplate attached on the side of transmitter. Make sure
that the product you received complies with the specifications in your order.
● Information stated on the product tag

Item Description
MODEL Product model
SERIAL NO. Serial No.
MAX. PRESS. Max. operating pressure
MAX. TEMP. Max. operating temperature
FLOW RANGE Flow range
POWER Power
TAG NO. Instrument No. (only when specified)
BORE Nominal flange size
DATE Date of manufacture
◆ Reminder ◆
When you make inquiries, include the product name, model No., serial No. and other pertinent
information.
1.2 Transportation Guidelines

(1) To prevent unexpected problems, transport the product to the installation site using the original
,
manufacturer s packing for shipment if circumstances permit.
(2) Use care to avoid impact shocks, rain and water during transportation.
1.3 Storage Guidelines

If this product is to be stored for long periods of time upon receipt before installation, unexpected
problems can arise. So when long-term storage is anticipated, it is suggested that the following
precautions be taken:
,
(1) Store your product in the manufacturer s original packing used for shipping if possible.
(2) Place of storage should conform to the following requirements:
● Free from rain and water.
● Free from vibration and impact shock.
● At room temperature with minimal temperature and humidity variation.
● Storage/shipping conditions
　 Temperature：20±15℃
　 Relative humidity：65±20％
　 Barometric pressure：500 to 1060hPa

L--740--28--E
1.4 Precautions for Operating Conditions

In order to maintain the design metering accuracy and long service life, it is essential that the ratings,
such as the flowrate, pressure, and temperature be held within the specified limits. These operating
conditions are stated in Sections "3. SPECIFICATIONS and PERFORMANCE" and "14. PRODUCT
CODE EXPLANATION", "15. PRODUCT CODE EXPLANATION OF THE OLD PRODUCT CODE" of this
manual. Do not fail to make sure of them before placing the meter in service.
・ If the process fluid is corrosive, the meter materials must be considered for compatibility.
・ Cleanse the interior of flow tube thoroughly after use for measuring fluids that tend to deposit
solids. A flow tube with solid deposits adhering to it can affect the meter accuracy.
・ If you want a change in operating conditions, consult the factory.
・ Some gas-mixed flows that are not homogeneous are not measurable. Consult the factory for
technical assistance in such applications.
1.5 Precautions for Installation Location

CAUTION
・If there is a risk of process pressure exceeding flowmeter's permissible pressure, a
pressure protection device must be installed on the process.
・Do not touch the surface of flowmeter directly. Depending on process conditions, the
surface temperature of flowmeter may be high or low.
・To ensure accurate and consistent measurement, the Coriolis flowmeter should be
installed in a location where pipeline oscillation will not exceed 0.3G.
1.6 Precautions for power-on

Be sure to close the display lid and the terminal lid of the transmitter before turning on the power. The
explosionproof enclosure must be ensured (with the requirements stated in section 10.5 satisfied) before
use.
To ensure the stable measuring condition, allow 20 minutes of warm-up period. "WARM UP 20" will be
displayed for 20 minutes after powering-on. The number indicates remaining warm-up period (min.).
1.7 Returning Equipment

If the meter must be returned to OVAL for any reason, follow these steps to ensure the most efficient
processing.
(1) Clean the unit and flush out the tubes without fail and pack the sensor unit carefully. Fully document
the fluid. Inadequate information will delay handling of the meter. (⇒ Fill in the forms prepared on
pages 160 and 161.)
(2) Enclose complete information about the material being returned including model and serial
number, the reason for return, return address, and full documentation of the type of fluid.
(3) Pack the equipment carefully, using the original packing if possible.
(4) Return the complete flowmeter, including the separately electronics unit with all of the circuit boards
and associated parts.
Remove the conduit connections and all other parts not originally shipped with the meter.
(example: wiring connections)
WARNING
1. Be sure to remove the accumulation of foreign matter on the inner walls of the
sensor unit completely. Because the sensor unit cannot be disassembled, OVAL will
not be able to handle residue inside the tubes and service your meter.
2. Do not touch instrument or housing directly if the process temperature is high.
3. Never loosen process connector nuts while instrument is still on process line, and
never let explosive fluid burst into atmosphere.
4. Do not touch process fluid or inside of instrument when removing instrument from
hazardous process line.

L--740--28--E
2. GENERAL AND FEATURES

2.1 General Description
The ALTImass series, consisting of a high performance model Type U, a straight-tube model Type S, and
a low-cost, general purpose model Type B, are Coriolis flowmeters capable of measuring mass flows at a
high degree of accuracy. Equipped integrally or separately from the sensor unit is a highly sophisticated
transmitter (self diagnosis feature, large size display, and field reconfiguration capability using a touch panel).
2.2 Features
1. Further improved zero stability over previously offered transmitters
2. Accurate density measurement: ±0.0005g/mL (When measuring liquid with CA003 to CA250 sensor
unit)
3. Fast response: 10 times faster than previously offered transmitters
4. Increased availability output-signal availability
Pulse output (dual outputs), current output (dual outputs), and status output (single output)
5. Reconfiguration of transmitter parameters available with finger touch on the touch panel (also through
communication)
6. Increased self-diagnostic capabilities: cable disconnection check, pipeline vibration check, and
transmitter temperature monitoring,
to name a few
7. Enhanced maintenance functions: error logging and factory default parameter reloading functions
8. 2 alarm indicators equipped
9. Compliant with various communication standards (HART, FOUNDATION Fieldbus, PROFIBUS, Modbus
communication)
10.The measurement of bubble mixed fluid is possible by the adjustment of Gas Multiphase Flow Alarm
(Slug Alarm) which is found in the Self-Diagnosis Function.
3. SPECIFICATIONS AND PERFORMANCE

3.1 Sensor Unit General Specifications
3.1.1 Type U sensor unit general specifications
● CA00A, CA001 and CA003　　　
Item Description
Model CA00A CA001 CA003
Nominal flange size 1/4" 10mm, 3/8" (※1), DN15
Wetted parts SUS316L SUS316L, SUS316L + Alloy C, Alloy C (※2)
Materials Housing SUS304
O-rings Fluorine rubber (Viton) —
JIS 10, 20, 30, 40, 63K RF / ASME (JPI) 150,
Process connection R 1/4 300, 600 RF / DIN PN 10, 16, 25, 40 RF (※3),
IDF ferrule (※4), screw-in
Acceptable fluids Liquid and gas
Density range 0 to 2.0 g/mL
Viscosity range Max.10000mPa・s (※5)
Temperature range －200 to ＋200° C (※6)
Tube withstands (at 20° C) — Wetted parts materials:：SUS316L 10MPa max.
Max. operating Liquid 15MPa at 20° C ：Alloy C 15MPa max.
pressure Gas 0.98MPa (Varies according to process connection.)
Sensor housing withstands (MPa) (※7) — 7.2
Flow direction Forward / Reverse
Explosionproof configuration Refer to section 10.4
Dusttight, waterproof configuration IP66 / 67
NOTES ※1: 1/2" for ASME and JPI flanges.
※2: When wetted parts are made from Alloy C, only screw type connection is adopted as standard.
※3: DIN franges are available only to meters of the wet part material, "SUS316L"and"SUS316L+Alloy C".
※4: For application to foods, this product does not comply with CE marking.
※5: If the viscosity is 10000mPa·s or more, contact OVAL.
※6: Refer to section 10.5 for the ambient temperature.
※7: This pressure does not represent the rated test pressure of a pressure vessel, but 1/4 of the breakdown test
pressure at OVAL (distorted enclosures do not constitute a failure of the test), or the data obtained from the FEM
analysis, whichever is lower (or safer).
※: For the product compliant with High Pressure Gas Safety Act or CE marking, consult us.
※: Only separately mounted transmitter is applicable.

L--740--28--E
● CA006 to CA080
Item Description
Model CA006 CA010 CA015 CA025 CA040 CA050 CA080
10mm, 3/8"(※1), 25mm, 1", 40mm, 1・1/2", 50mm, 2", 80mm, 3",
Nominal flange size 15mm, 1/2", DN15
DN15 DN25 DN40 DN50 DN80
Wetted parts SUS316L, SUS316 + Alloy C, Alloy C
Materials
Housing SUS304
JIS 10, 20, 30, 40, 63K RF / ASME (JPI) 150, 300, 600 RF
Process connection
DIN PN 10, 16, 25, 40 RF(※2), IDF ferrule (※3), screw-in
Density range 0 to 2.0g/mL
Temperature range Separately mounted: －200 to ＋200℃, Integrally mounted: －200 to ＋150℃ (※5) (※6)
Tube withstands (at 20°
C) 9.4MPa (※7)
Max. operating pressure Varies according to process connection.
Sensor housing withstands
3.8 3.0 2.2 1.6 1.8 1.4
(MPa). (※8)
Explosionproof
Refer to section 10.4
configuration
Dusttight, waterproof
IP66 / 67
configuration
NOTES ※1: 1/2" for ASME and JPI flanges.
※2: DIN franges are available only to meters of the wet part material, "SUS316L"and"SUS316L+Alloy C".
※4: If the viscosity is 10000mPa·s or more, contact OVAL.
※5: Refer to section 10.4 for explosionproof specification.
Refer to section 10.5 for the ambient temperature.
※6: In case of PED specification, the minimum temperature lower limit is －196℃.
※7: Refer to section 3.1.5 for PED specification.
pressure at OVAL (distorted enclosures do not constitute a failure of the test), or the data obtained from the FEM
analysis, whichever is lower (or safer).
※: For availability of high pressure gas safety regulation compliant and CE mark compliant products, consult the
factory.
● CA100 to CA250
Item Description
Model CA100 CA150 CA15H CA200 CA20H CA250
100mm, 4", 250mm, 10",
Nominal flange size 150mm, 6", DN150 200mm, 8", DN200
DN100 DN250
Wetted parts SUS316L
Materials
Housing SUS304
Process connection JIS 10, 20, 30, 40K RF / ASME (JPI) 150, 300, 600 RF / DIN PN 10, 16, 25, 40 RF
Acceptable fluid Liquid
Density range 0.3 to 2.0g/mL
Temperature range Separately mounted: －200 to ＋200℃, Integrally mounted: －200 to ＋150℃ (※2) (※3)
Tube withstands (at 20°
C) (※4) 13.56MPa 10.6MPa 8.8MPa
Explosionproof
configuration
IP66 / 67
configuration
NOTES ※1: If the viscosity is 10000mPa·s or more, contact OVAL.
※3: In case of PED specification, the minimum temperature lower limit is －196℃.
※: For products that are compliant with the High Pressure Gas Safety Act, consult OVAL.

L--740--28--E
● High pressure service models (CA010 and CA015)

Item Description
Model CA010 (high pressure service) CA015 (high pressure service)
Wetted parts Flow tube: Alloy C, Manifold: Equivalent to Alloy C (CX2MW)
Materials
Housing SUS304
Process connection Screw-in Rc 3/8 Screw-in Rc 3/4
Temperature range Separately mounted :－200 to ＋200℃, Integrally mounted: －200 to ＋150℃ (※2) (※3)
Max. operating pressure 36MPa at room temperature 43MPa at room temperature
Sensor housing withstands (※3) 3.0MPa 2.2MPa
NOTES ※1: If the viscosity is 10000mPa·s or more, contact OVAL.

※3: This pressure does not represent the rated test pressure of a pressure vessel, but 1/4 of the breakdown
test pressure at OVAL (distorted enclosures do not constitute a failure of the test), or the data obtained
from the FEM analysis, whichever is lower (or safer).
● Low temperature explosionproof service models (CA025 to CA250)

Item Description
Model CA025 CA040 CA050 CA080 CA100 CA150 CA15H CA200 CA20H CA250
25mm, 1", 40mm, 1・1/2", 50mm, 2", 80mm, 3", 100mm, 4", 250mm, 10",
DN25 DN40 DN50 DN80 DN100 DN250
Wetted parts SUS316L, SUS316 + Alloy C,Alloy C SUS316L
Materials
Housing SUS304
JIS 10, 20, 30,40,63K RF / ASME (JPI) 150, 300, 600 RF JIS 10, 20, 30K RF / ASME (JPI) 150, 300, 600 RF
Process connection (※1)
DIN PN 10, 16, 25, 40 RF (※2), IDF ferrule (※3) DIN PN 10, 16, 25, 40 RF (※2)
Acceptable fluids Liquid and gas Liquid
Viscosity range Max.10000mPa・s
Temperature range －200 to ＋50℃ (Separately mounted only) (※4)
Tube withstands 9.4MPa (at 20℃) 13.56MPa (at 20℃) 10.6MPa (at 40℃) 8.8MPa (at 40℃)
Max. operating pressure Varies according to process connection. (※5)
Sensor housing
1.6MPa 1.8MPa 1.4MPa —
withstands (※6)
Explosionproof
configuration
IP66 / 67
configuration
NOTES ※1: When "SUS316L" or "SUS316L + Alloy C" is selected for the materials of wetted parts, the flange material
is "SUS316". (CA025 to CA080)
※2: For the material of DIN flange, you cannot select "Alloy C".
※4: Refer to section 10.5 for the ambient temperature.
pressure at OVAL (distorted enclosures do not constitute a failure of the test), or the data obtained from the
FEM analysis, whichever is lower (or safer).
※: For the product compliant with High Pressure Gas Safety Act or CE marking, consult us.

L--740--28--E
● High temperature service models (CA025 to CA080)

Item Description
CA025 CA040 CA050 CA080
Model
(high temperature service) (high temperature service) (high temperature service) (high temperature service)
Nominal flange size 25mm, 1", DN25 40mm, 1・1/2", DN40 50mm, 2", DN50 80mm, 3", DN80
SUS316L
Wetted parts SUS316L SUS316L＋Alloy C
Materials Alloy C
Housing SUS304
Process connection JIS 10, 20, 30, 40, 63K RF / ASME
（JPI）150, 300, 600 RF / DIN PN 10, 16, 25, 40 RF
Acceptable fluids Liquid
Temperature range (※1) －40 to ＋350℃ (Separately mounted only)
Tube withstands (at 20℃) 9.4MPa
Max. operating pressure Varies according to process connection. (※2)
Sensor housing withstands (※3) 1.6MPa 1.8MPa 1.4MPa
Heat Tracer Specifications (CA025 to CA080 Option)

Acceptable fluids Hot water, Saturated steam, Overheated steam
Heat retention fluid max. output pressure 0.98MPa
Joint port for heat retention fluid φ10 stainless steel tube
Recommended joint Tube joint manufactured by Swagelok Company
NOTES ※1: Allowable ambient temperature permitted for the sensor unit is up to 50℃.
※3: This pressure does not represent the rated test pressure of a pressure vessel, but 1/4 of the breakdown
test pressure at OVAL (distorted enclosures do not constitute a failure of the test), or the data obtained
from the FEM analysis, whichever is lower (or safer).
※: For availability of high pressure gas safety regulation compliant and CE mark compliant products, consult
the factory.
● High temperature service models (CA100, CA150)

Item Description
Model CA100 (high temperature service) CA150 (high temperature service)
Materials
Housing SUS304
Process connection JIS 10, 20, 30K RF / ASME
（JPI）150, 300, 600 RF / DIN PN 10, 16, 25, 40 RF
Acceptable fluids Liquid
Temperature range －40 to ＋350℃ (※1)
Tube withstands (at 20℃) 13.5MPa

Max. operating pressure Varies according to process connection.(※2)
NOTES ※1: Max. ambient temperature of the sensor unit is 50℃.

※: Only separately-mounted transmitter is applicable.
10
L--740--28--E
3.1.2 Type S sensor unit general specifications

● Stainless steel tube type (CS010 to CS080)
Item Description
Model CS010 CS015 CS025 CS040 CS050 CS080
Nominal flange size 15mm or 1/2" 15mm or 1/2" 25mm or 1" 40mm or 1・1/2" 50mm or 2" 80mm or 3"
Materials
Housing SUS304
Process connection JIS 10, 20K RF / ASME (JPI) 150 RF, IDF ferrule
Density range 0.5 to 1.0g/mL, 0.7 to 1.3g/mL, 1.0 to 1.5g/mL (※1)
Measurable temperature range －40 to ＋130℃ for both integrally and separately mounted types (※2)
Heatproof temperature 150℃ max. (※3)
Sensor housing withstands 2.8MPa
NOTE ※1: Density range varies with the fluid used.
In case of non-explosionproof type, the maximum measurement temperature is 130℃. However, the product
must be used within the maximum ambient temperature of 45℃.
※3: CIP/SIP procedures must be performed within the heatproof temperature range.
※: Temperature class for integral type is T4.
● Titanium tube type (CS010 to CSR50)

Item Description
Model CS010 CS015 CS025 CS040 CS050 CSR50
Nominal flange size 10mm or 1/2" 15mm or 1/2" 25mm or 1" 40mm or 1・1/2" 50mm or 2" 80mm or 3"
Wetted parts SB338 Grade-9＋TB480H
Materials
Housing SUS304
Process connection JIS 10, 20K / ASME (JPI) 150 / IDF ferrule (※1)
Density range 0.5 to 1.0g/mL, 0.7 to 1.3g/mL, 1.0 to 1.5g/mL (※2)
Measurable temperature range －40 to ＋130℃ (※3)
Sensor housing withstands 2.8MPa
NOTE ※1: Loose flange is applied. Ferrule connections of models CS010 and CS015 comply with ISO2852.
　　　　 ※2: Density range varies with the fluid used.
　　　　 ※3: Refer to section 10.4 for explosionproof specification.
In case of non-explosionproof models, the maximum measurement temperature of integrally mounted
type is 130℃. However, the product must be used within the maximum ambient temperature of 45℃.
　　　　 ※4: CIP/SIP procedures must be performed within the heatproof temperature range.
　　　　 ※: Temperature class for integral type is T4.
※: If polished wetted parts are desired, contact OVAL.
3.1.3 Type B sensor unit general specifications
Item Description
Model CB006 CB010 CB015 CB025 CB040 CB050
10mm 15mm 15mm 25mm 40mm 50mm
Nominal flange size or 1/2" or 1/2" or 1/2" or 1" or 1・1/2" or 2"
Materials
Housing SUS304
Process connection JIS 10, 20, 30K / ASME (JPI) 150, 300, 600 RF, IDF ferrule
Measurable temperature range －40 to ＋125° C (※1)
NOTE ※1: Refer to section 10.4 for explosionproof specification.
In case of non-explosionproof model, up to 125℃ is permitted. However, the product must be used within
the maximum ambient temperature of 45℃.
※2: CIP/SIP procedures must be performed within the heatproof temperature range.
11
L--740--28--E
3.1.4 Transmitter general specifications

Item Description
Model PA0K
Power source 85 to 264VAC, 50 / 60Hz (Safety rated 100 to 240VAC 50/60Hz) or 20 to 30VDC
Power consumption 15W max.
Ambient temperature －40 to ＋55°
C (※1)
Type U 200 meters max. (using dedicated interconnect cable) (※2)
Transmission length Stainless steel tube type: 50 meters max. (using dedicated interconnect cable) (※2)
Type S
(separately-located type) Titanium tube type: 100 meters max. (using dedicated interconnect cable) (※2)
Type B 5 meters max. (using dedicated interconnect cable) (※2)
EMC Diective ：2014/30/EC
Applicable EU directive ATEX Diective：94/9/EC
LVD Diective ：2014/35/EU
EMC ：EN61326-1：2013 ClassA
ATEX ：EN60079-0：2012 EN60079-1：2007 EN60079-11：2012
Applicable EN standards
IECEx：IEC60079-0：2011 IEC60079-1：2007-04 IEC60079-11：2011
LVD 　：EN61010-1：2010
Maritime certification DNV GL (Refer to section 12)
Transmitter construction Integrally mounted or separately mounted
Finish Body: Munsell 10B8/4 Covers (front and rear): Munsell 2.5PB4/10
LCD display (128×64dots) Backlight (white and orange)
Display
2 infrared optical sensors and 2 LEDs (green and red)
Weight Integrally mounted type 3.6kg; Separately mounted type 5.0kg
HART HART protocol 7, Bell202 (※3)
(standard)
RS-485 Modbus protocol, Baudrate : 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Communication interface Modbus
RTU or ASCII, Response time : 25 to 50 ms
※Optional except for HART
FOUNDATION AI block×4, IT block×2, with Link Master function
Fieldbus
PROFIBUS PA AI block×4, TOT block×2
Damping (default) Flowrate 0.8sec, density 4sec, temp. 2.5sec
}
Type U 0.6%
or less of maximum
Low flow cutoff (default) Type S 1.5% normal flowrate
Type B 1.0%
Open drain output (equivalent to open collector output) [Min. 10V to Max. 30V,
50mADC, ON resistance 0.6Ωor less] or
Pulse output (※5)
Voltage pulse（Low Level：1.5V max. High Level：13V min. Output impedance: 2.2kΩ）
Setting range: 0.1 to 0000Hz（Max. output 11000Hz）
4 to 20mADC Max. load 600Ω
Analog output (※5)
Select 2 outputs from instant flowrate (mass or volume), temp., and density. (※6)
Open drain output (equivalent to open collector output) [Max. 30V, 50mADC,
Status output (※5) ON resistance 0.6Ωor less] or
Select one from error (※4), flow direction, and high/low alarm (default is error).
Contact-closure input (Form "a" input) Short: 200Ω max. Open: 100kΩ min.
Status input (※5) Select one from "remote zero adjust" total reset, 0% signal lock, and function OFF
(default is function OFF).
OIML R117-1:2007
Other standard
MID (WELMEC 7.2, 8.8)
NOTES ※1: Below -20℃, the display loses its visibility due to weakened contrast. Both the display and infrared
　　　　　　 sensor may exhibit slow responses below -20℃.
※2: If signal cable length exceeds Max transmission length, consult the factory.
※3: Of the two analog output systems,only analog output 1 is available for HART communication.
※4: Of error outputs, "zero adjust is in progress" status output can also be set up.
※5: When FOUNDATION Fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA is selected as the communication interface, all input and
output signals will be turned off.
※6: The Type S stainless steel tube type does not support the density output.
Fixed density is used for the volume output.
※: Denoising parts are embedded in the lines between power source, output, communication, and the
chassis.
Lower the applied voltage to the following levels in order to conduct insulation test or withstand voltage
test on these lines.
AC：200V, DC：250V
3.1.5 Max. operating temperature of PED specification

● PED Specifications (Maximum operating pressure)•••CA040 to CA250 Unit: MPa
Operating
ASME Flange Rating DIN Flange Rating
Temperature
150 lb 300 lb 600 lb PN10 PN16 PN25 PN40
to 38℃ 1.90 4.96 9.93 ① 1.00 1.60 2.50 4.00
to 50℃ 1.84 4.81 9.62 ② 1.00 1.60 2.50 4.00
to 100℃ 1.62 4.22 8.44 ③ 1.00 1.60 2.50 4.00
to 150℃ 1.48 3.85 7.70 ④ 0.90 1.45 2.27 3.63
to 200℃ 1.37 3.57 7.13 ⑤ 0.84 1.34 2.10 3.37
to 250℃ 1.21 3.34 6.68 0.79 1.27 1.98 3.18
to 300℃ 1.02 3.16 6.32 0.74 1.18 1.85 2.97
to 350℃ 0.84 3.03 6.07 0.71 1.14 1.78 2.85
① For CA20H and CA250, 8.8MPa is max. operating pressure
② For CA20H and CA250, 8.5MPa is max. operating pressure
③ For CA20H and CA250, 7.4MPa is max. operating pressure
④ For CA20H and CA250, 6.7MPa is max. operating pressure
⑤ For CA20H and CA250, 6.2MPa is max. operating pressure
※: Only SUS316L is available as the major parts material.
12
L--740--28--E
3.2 General Performance

Zero stability
Zero stability error = ×100%
Flowrate at the time of testing
※: Measurement unit of zero stability and flowrate at the time of testing must be the same.
3.2.1 Type U general performance

● Standard (CA00A, CA001 and CA003)
Item Description
Model CA00A CA001 CA003
Guar. min. meas. rate 0.024kg/h (0.4g/min) 0.09kg/h (1.5g/min) 0.72kg/h
Min. setting rate 0.12kg/h (2g/min) 0.45kg/h (7.5g/min) 3.6kg/h
Max. service rate 2.4kg/h (40g/min) 9kg/h (150g/min) 72kg/h
Max. allowable rate 3.6kg/h (60g/min) 13.5kg/h (225g/min) 144kg/h (180※1)
Flowrate Liquid ±0.2% ± Zero stability error of reading ±0.1% of reading (※2)
Accuracy
Gas ±0.5% ± Zero stability error of reading
Liquid ±0.05% ± 1/2 Zero stability error of reading ±0.05% of reading (※3)
Repeatability
Gas ±0.25% ± 1/2 Zero stability error of reading
Zero stability 0.00036kg/h (0.006g/min) 0.00135kg/h (0.0225g/min) 0.0018kg/h
Density Measuring range 0.3 to 2.0g/mL
(liquid) Accuracy (Option) ±0.003g/mL ±0.0005g/mL
Analog output accuracy 0.1% of full scale for respective accuracy
NOTES ※1: When maximum allowable range 180 kg/h is adopted, the guaranteed minimum flow rate is 0.9 kg/h.
※2: ±Zero stability error is applied for flow rates below 2.5% of the max. service rate. (within
guaranteed flow range)
※3: ±1/2 Zero stability error is applied for flow rates below 2.5% of the max. service rate. (within
※: The general performance is based on factory calibration accuracy.
● Standard (CA006 to CA080), Low temperature explosionproof service models (CA025 to CA080)
Item Description
Model CA006 CA010 CA015 CA025 CA040 CA050 CA080
Guar. min. meas. rate (kg/h) 3.6 12 36 108 390 1200
Min. setting rate (kg/h) 18 60 180 540 1950 6000
Max. service rate (kg/h) 360 1200 3600 10800 39000 120000
Max. allowable rate (kg/h) 720 2400 7200 21600 78000 240000
Flowrate Liquid [±0.1% ± Zero stability error] of reading (※1)
Accuracy
Gas [±0.5% ± Zero stability error] of reading
Liquid [±0.05% ± 1/2 Zero stability error] of reading (※2)
Repeatability
Gas [±0.25% ± 1/2 Zero stability error] of reading
Zero stability (kg/h) 0.018 0.06 0.18 0.54 1.95 6
Density Measuring range 0.3 to 2.0g/mL
(liquid) Accuracy ±0.0005g/mL
NOTES ※1: ±Zero stability error is applied for flow rates below 5% of the max. service rate. (within guaranteed
flow range)
※2: ±1/2 Zero stability error is applied for flow rates below 5% of the max. service rate. (within
※: The general performance is based on factory calibration accuracy.
CAUTION: 1. For applications of volume flow measurement subject to taxation or in
transactions, consult the factory.
2. In gas measurement, the maximum permissible flow velocity varies with the kind
of gas and certain gases may be unacceptable for measurement. In such a case,
consult the factory.
13
L--740--28--E
● Standard (CA100 to CA250), Low temperature explosionproof service models (CA100 to CA250)
Item Description
Model CA100 CA150 CA15H CA200 CA20H CA250
Guar. min. meas. rate (kg/h) 3420 7000 14000
Min. setting rate (kg/h) 17100 35000 70000
Max. allowable rate (kg/h) 684000 1400000 2800000
Flowrate Max. service rate (kg/h) 342000 700000 1400000
Accuracy ±0.1% of reading (※1) [±0.1% ± Zero stability error] of reading (※3)
Repeatability ±0.05% of reading (※2) [±0.05% ±1/2 Zero stability error] of reading
Zero stability (kg/h) 17.1 35 70
Density Measuring rate 0.3 to 2.0g/mL
(liquid) Factory calib. acc. (opt) ±0.0005g/mL
NOTE: ※1: ±Zero stability error is applied for flow rates below 5% of the max. service rate. (within guaranteed
flow range)
※2: ±1/2 Zero stability error is applied for flow rates below 5% of the max. service rate. (within guaranteed
flow range)
※3: If higher accuracy (±0.1% of reading) is required, consult OVAL.
　※: The general performance is based on factory calibration accuracy.
CAUTION: For applications of volume flow measurement subject to taxation or in transactions,
● High pressure service models (CA010 and CA015)

Item Description
Model CA010 (high pressure service) CA015 (high pressure service)
Guar. min. meas. rate (kg/h) 24 78
Min. setting rate (kg/h) 120 390
Max. service rate (kg/h) 840 2550
Max. allowable rate (kg/h) 1680 5100
[±0.2% ± Zero stability error] of reading
Flowrate Liquid
Accuracy At flow rate exceeding max. service rate, [± 0.3% ± Zero stability error] of reading
Gas [±0.5% ± Zero stability error] of reading
Liquid [±0.1% ± 1/2 Zero stability error] of reading
Repeatability
Gas [±0.25% ± 1/2 Zero stability error] of reading
Zero stability (kg/h) 0.21 0.636
NOTE: The general performance is based on factory calibration accuracy.

CAUTION: 1. For applications of volume flow measurement subject to taxation or in
transactions, consult the factory.
2. In gas measurement, the maximum permissible flow velocity varies with the kind
of gas and certain gases may be unacceptable for measurement. In such a case,
14
L--740--28--E
● High temperature service models (CA025 to CA080)

Item Description
CA025 CA040 CA050 CA080
Model
(High temp. service) (High temp. service) (High temp. service) (High temp. service)
Guar. min. meas. rate
108 390 1200
(kg/h)
Min. setting rate (kg/h) 540 1950 6000
Max. allowable rate
Flowrate 21600 78000 240000
(kg/h)
(liquid) Max. service rate (kg/h) 10800 39000 120000
Accuracy [±0.1% ± Zero stability error] of reading
Repeatability [±0.05% ± 1/2 Zero stability error] of reading
Zero stability (kg/h) 1.08 3.9 12
● High temperature service models (CA100, CA150)

Item Description
Model CA100 (High temp. service) CA150 (High temp. service)
Guar. min. meas. rate
3420
(kg/h)
Min. setting rate (kg/h) 17100
Max. service rate (kg/h) 342000
Flowrate Max. allowable rate
(liquid) 684000
(kg/h)
Accuracy [±0.1% ± Zero stability error] of reading
Repeatability [±0.05% ± 1/2 Zero stability error] of reading
Zero stability (kg/h) 34.2
15
L--740--28--E
3.2.2 Type S general performance

● Stainless steel tube type (CS010 to CS080)
Item Description
Model CS010 CS015 CS025 CS040 CS050 CS080
Guar. min. meas. rate (kg/h) 36 120 360 900 1800 3600
Min. setting rate (kg/h) 72 240 720 1800 3600 7200
Max. service rate (kg/h) 720 2400 7200 18000 36000 72000
Flowrate Max. allowable rate (kg/h) 1080 3600 10800 27000 54000 108000
Accuracy ±0.2% ± Zero stability error of reading
Repeatability ±0.1% ± 1/2 Zero stability error of reading
Zero stability (kg/h) 0.36 1.2 3.6 9 18 36
● Titanium tube type (CS010 to CSR50)

Item Description
Model CS010 CS015 CS025 CS040 CS050 CSR50
Guar. min. meas. rate (kg/h) 36 120 360 900 1800
Min. setting rate (kg/h) 72 240 720 1800 3600
Max. service rate (kg/h) 1220 4080 12200 30600 61200
Flowrate Max. allowable rate (kg/h) 1830 6120 18300 45900 91800
Accuracy ±0.15% ± Zero stability error of reading
Repeatability ±0.075% ± 1/2 Zero stability error of reading
Zero stability (kg/h) 0.12 0.41 1.22 3.06 6.12
Density Measuring rate 0.5 to 1.0g/mL, 0.7 to 1.3g/mL, 1.0 to 1.5g/mL　（※1）
(liquid) Accuracy (Option) ±0.002g/mL
NOTES ※1：Density range varies with the fluid used.

※：When measuring the density at fluid temperature 40℃ or higher, heat retention measures must be taken.
※：The general performance is based on factory calibration accuracy.
3.2.3 Type B general performance

Item Description
Model CB006 CB010 CB015 CB025 CB040 CB050
Guar. min. meas. rate (kg/h) 24 76.8 192 576 1920
Min. setting rate (kg/h) 60 192 480 1440 4800
Max. service rate (kg/h) 600 1920 4800 14400 48000
Flowrate Max. allowable rate (kg/h) 1200 3840 9600 28800 96000
Accuracy ±0.2%±Zero stability error of reading
Repeatability ±0.1%±1/2 Zero stability error of reading
Zero stability (kg/h) 0.09 0.288 0.72 2.16 7.2
Measuring rate 0.3 to 2.0g/mL
Density
Accuracy (Option) ±0.003 g/mL
16
L--740--28--E
3.3 Display
Display modes
①Mass instant flowrate
②Volume instant flowrate
③Density
④Temperature
⑤Pulse count 1 (mass or volume)
⑥Pulse count 2 (mass or volume)
⑦Total 1 (mass or volume)
⑧Total 2 (mass or volume)
⑨Analog 1 (% instant)
⑩Analog 2 (% instant)
⑪Status information
LED (Green)
⑫Mode select (parameter setup)
Communication interfaces FOUNDATION Fieldbus,
PROFIBUS PA display different contents.
LED (Red) For further information, refer to the instruction manuals
of respective communication interfaces.
A touch of a finger on the touch panel through the front glass
※ LCD backlight comes in two colors: white and orange. (infrared optical sensor) selects the mode.
Color changes according to the status of flowmeter. NOTE: If the infrared sensors do not respond sufficiently, use LinkTop
Backlight usually comes off automatically if the optical to adjust the sensitivity.
sensor does not respond for a certain period of time. In case you do not have LinkTop, use a reflecting subject, such
※ Backlight duration is selectable. as a sheet of paper, to operate the switches.
Fig. 3.1
4. PRESSURE LOSSES
4.1 Type U Pressure Losses
CA00A CA001
100 100
10 10
1 1 1000mPa・s
Pressure loss coeff., C
1000mPa・s
0.1 0.1 10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
0.01 0.01 10 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
0.001 0.001 1mPa・s
1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
0. 01mPa・s
0.00001 0.00001
0. 01mPa・s
0.000001 0.000001
0.1 1.0 10 100 1 10 100 1000
Flowrate (g/min) Flowrate (g/min)
CA003 CA006
100 100
10 10
1 1
0.1 1000mPa・s 0.1

1000mPa・s
0.01 10 0 mPa・s 0.01

10 0 mPa・s
0.001 10 mPa・s 0.001

10 mPa・s
0.0001 1mPa・s 0.0001

1mPa・s
0.00001 0.00001
0. 01mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
0.000001 0.000001
0.1 1 10 100 1000 1 10 100 1000
Flowrate (kg/h) Flowrate (kg/h)
CA010 Fig.4.1.1 CA015

10 10
,
1 1 Cont d on next page
e loss coeff., C
e loss coeff., C
17
0.1 0.1
1000mPa・s 1000mPa・s
0.01 0.01
10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
0.01 10 0 mPa・s 0.01
Pressure los
Pressure los
10 0 mPa・s
0.001 10 mPa・s 0.001

10 mPa・s
L--740--28--E 0.0001 1mPa・s 0.0001

1mPa・s
0.00001 0.00001
0. 01mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
0.000001 0.000001
0.1 1 10 100 1000 1 10 100 1000
CA010 CA015
10 10
CA015
10 10
1 1
1 1

0.1 0.1

1000mPa・s 0.1 1000mPa・s 0.1
0.01 0.01
1000mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s 0.01 0.01
10 0 mPa・s
0.001 0.001
10 0 mPa・s
10 mPa・s 0.001 0.001
10 mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
10 mPa・s
1mPa・s 0.0001 0.0001
1mPa・s
0.00001 0.00001
0. 01mPa・s 0. 1mPa・s
01mPa・s
0.00001 0.00001
0.000001 0.000001 0. 01mPa・s
1 10 100 1000 10000 1 100 1000 10000
0.000001 0.000001
Flowrate (kg/h) 1 100 Flowrate (kg/h) 1000 10000 10
Flowrate (kg/h)
CA025 CA040, CA050
10
CA025 10 CA040, CA050
10 10 10
1 1
1 1 1
C C
C C
0.1 0.1
coeff.,
coeff.,

0.1 0.1 0.1
coeff.,
coeff.,
0.01 1000mPa・s 0.01

loss loss
lossloss
1000mPa・s
0.01 1000mPa・s 0.01 0.01
0.001 10 0 mPa・s 1000mPa・s
Pressure
Pressure
0.001
10 0 mPa・s
Pressure
0.001 10 0 mPa・s 0.001

Pressure
0.001
0.0001 10 mPa・s 0.0001 10 0 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
0.0001 10 mPa・s 0.0001 0.0001
1mPa・s 10 1mPa・s
mPa・s
0.00001 0.00001
0. 01mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
1mPa・s 1mPa・s
0.00001 0.00001 0.00001
0. 01mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
0.000001 0.000001
10 100 1000 10000 100000 100 1000 10000 100000
0.000001 0.000001 0.000001
10000 10 100 Flowrate 1000
(kg/h) 10000 100000 100 1000 Flowrate (kg/h) 10000 100000 100
CA080 CA100, CA150

10 CA080 10 CA100, CA150
10 1 10
1 1
1 0.1 1
C C
C C
0.1
0.1
coeff.,
coeff.,

0.1 0.1
coeff.,
coeff.,
0.01
0.01
lossloss
lossloss
0.01 1000mPa・s 0.01 0.01

1000mPa・s
1000mPa・s
1000mPa・s 0.001
Pressure
0.001
Pressure
1
10 0 mPa・s 0.001
Pressure
0.001
Pressure
0.001
10 0 mPa・s 10 0 mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001 10 0 mPa・s
10 mPa・s 1
0.0001 0.0001
101mPa・s
mPa・s 0.0001 10 mPa・s
0.00001 10 mPa・s
0. 01mPa・s
1mPa・s 1mPa・s 0. 01mPa・s
0.00001
0.00001 0. 01mPa・s 0.00001 0
1000 1mPa・s 10000
0. 01mPa・s 100000 1000000
0.000001 0.00001
100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 1000 10000 Flowrate (kg/h) 100000 1000000
0.000001 0.000001
100000 100 1000 Flowrate10000
(kg/h) 100000 1000000 Flowrate (kg/h) 1000
Flowrate (kg/h)
CA15H, CA200 CA20H, CA250

10 10
1 1
0.1 0.1
0.01 0.01
1000mPa・s
0.001 0.001 1000mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001 10 0 mPa・s
10 mPa・s 10 mPa・s
1mPa・s 1mPa・s
0.00001 0. 01mPa・s 0.00001 0. 01mPa・s
1000000
0.000001 0.000001
1000 10000 100000 1000000 10000000 1000 10000 100000 1000000 10000000
Fig.4.1.2
18
L--740--28--E
4.2 Type S Pressure Losses
CS010 CS015
10 10
5 0 0 mPa・s
1 1 2 0 0 mPa・s

10 0 mPa・s
0.1 5 0 0 mPa・s 0.1

2 0 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
0.01 5 0 mPa・s 0.01
5 0 mPa・s
5 mPa・s
0.001 1mPa・s 0.001 5 mPa・s
1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
10 100 1000 10000 100 1000 10000
CS025 CS040
1 1
0.1

0.1
5 0 0 mPa・s 5 0 0 mPa・s
2 0 0 mPa・s 2 0 0 mPa・s
0.01 0.01
10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
5 0 mPa・s 5 0 mPa・s
5 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
5 mPa・s 1mPa・s
0.001 0.001
1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
100 1000 10000 100000 100 1000 10000 100000
CS050 CS080
1 1
1mPa・s
0.1 0.1
5 0 0 mPa・s
0.01 0.01
2 0 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
5 0 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
0.001 5 mPa・s 0.001
1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
100 1000 10000 10000 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000
CS010（Titanium tube type） CS015（Titanium tube type）

10 10
5 0 0 mPa・s
5 0 0 mPa・s
1 2 0 0 mPa・s 1
2 0 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
5 0 mPa・s
0.1 0.1
0.01 0.01
5 0 mPa・s
0.001 10 mPa・s 0.001
10 mPa・s
5 mPa・s
5 mPa・s
1mPa・s 1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
10 100 1000 10000 100 1000 10000
CS025（Titanium tube type） CS040（Titanium tube type）

1 1
0.1 0.1
5 0 0 mPa・s
5 0 0 mPa・s
0.01 0.01
2 0 0 mPa・s
2 0 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
5 0 mPa・s
5 0 mPa・s
0.001 0.001
5 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
5 mPa・s
1mPa・s
1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
100 1000 10000 100000 100 1000 10000 100000
Fig.4.2.1
19
L--740--28--E
CS050（Titanium tube type） CSR50（Titanium tube type）

1 1
0.1 0.1

0.01 5 0 0 mPa・s 0.01 5 0 0 mPa・s
2 0 0 mPa・s 2 0 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s 10 0 mPa・s
0.001 5 0 mPa・s 0.001 5 0 mPa・s
5 mPa・s 5 mPa・s
1mPa・s 1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
1000 10000 100000 1000 10000 100000
Fig.4.2.2
4.3 Type B Pressure Losses

CB006 CB010
100 10
10
1

1
1000mPa・s 1000mPa・s
0.1
0.1
10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
0.01
0.01
10 mPa・s
10 mPa・s
0.001
0.001
1mPa・s
1mPa・s
0. 0 1mPa・s 0. 0 1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
10 100 1000 10000 10 100 1000 10000
CB015 CB025
10 10
1 1
0.1 0.1
1000mPa・s
1000mPa・s
0.01 0.01
10 0 mPa・s
10 0 mPa・s
0.001 10 mPa・s 0.001

10 mPa・s
1mPa・s 1mPa・s
0. 0 1mPa・s 0. 0 1mPa・s
0.0001 0.0001
10 100 1000 10000 100000 10 100 1000 10000 100000
CB040, CB050
10
1
0.1
1000mPa・s
0.01
10 0 mPa・s
0.001
10 mPa・s
1mPa・s 0. 0 1mPa・s
0.0001
10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000
Flowrate (kg/h)
Fig.4.3
◎ How to determine pressure loss (※1)

(1) Seeing the graph of the type of flowmeter to be (2) For high-viscosity liquids not shown in the graphs, calculate
used, find the pressure loss coefficient C from the the pressure loss by the following equation:
flowrate (g/min. or kg/h) and viscosity (mPa・s). μ2 1
Dividing this value C by specific gravity d (1 for ΔP2 = C× －－－ ×－－－
μ 1 d
water) gives the pressure loss, or where ΔP2: Pressure loss of high-viscosity liquid (MPa)
μ1: Maximum viscosity shown in the graph (mPa・s)
C μ2: Viscosity of high-viscosity liquid (mPa・s)
ΔP = －
－－－ (MPa)
d d: Specific gravity of high-viscosity liquid (1 for water)
C: Pressure loss coefficient found from the maximum
※1: Pressure loss is calculated with Newtonian fluid.
viscosity curve at a given flowrate
　For Non-Newtonian fluid, please consult OVAL.
(g/min. or kg/h)
20
L--740--28--E
5. PART NAMES AND OUTLINE DIMENSIONS

5.1 Type U
5.1.1 CA00A, CA001 and CA003 (separately mounted models)
Dimensions in millimeters
52
Ground screw
Terminal box
98
Flow direction
30 R1/4 Process connection 37
Flow direction arrow
63
16
Cable entry
G3/4
Main body (G1/2 : TIIS)
143
175
φ107
210 179
4-φ9 Fitting hole 230 237
(Fits M8 bolt.) Cable entry L
G 3/4
Fig. 5.1 Outline Dimensions
107 of Sensor Unit98(CA00A and CA001) Approx. weight: 9 kg
Cable entry
G 3/4（G1/2：TIIS） L
107 98
109
Screw-in type
H
φD
h1
L
109
A W
10
Ground screw Screw conn. App. Weight

Model L
Flange rating kg (JIS 10K)
CA003 Rc3/8 332 4.5
h1
A W ※: This table is applied to material

10
Ground screw code S and M. In case of code H,

Flange App. Weight
please consult our representative.
Model L H h1 A W ※: Flange size for model CA003 is
Nom. size Flange rating kg (JIS 10K)
JIS 10K 275 1/2" in case of ASME or JPI.
JIS 20K 275 ※: As long as flange O.D. and bolt
10 JIS 30K 293 holes remain the same while flange
JIS 40K 293 rating may differ, the flange
JIS 63K 313
CA003 230 67 89.1 192 5.0 thickness with the higher rating is
ASME, JPI 150 301
chosen in the above.
1/2″ ASME, JPI 300 310
ASME, JPI 600 322 ※: DIN flanges are available only to
PN 10, 16 275 meters of the material code, "S"
DN15 and "M".
PN 25, 40 281
NOTE: Approximate weights in the table above are of JIS 10K.
,
　 For specifications of other flange ratings, see the approval drawing (or customer s acceptance specification).
Fig. 5.2 Outline Dimensions of Sensor Unit (CA003)
21
L--740--28--E
5.1.2 CA006 thru CA080 (integrally mounted models)

230
64 127
φ134
Cable entry
60
G3/4
Flow direction
H
h1
10
W
A Ground screw L
Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W kg (JIS 10K)
Nom. size Flange rating
JIS 10K 242
JIS 20K 242
10 JIS 30K 260
JIS 40K 260
JIS 63K 280
CA006 424 180 53 148 7
ASME, JPI 150 267
3/8˝ ASME, JPI 300 276
ASME, JPI 600 289
PN 10, 16 241
DN15
PN 25, 40 247
JIS 10K 256
JIS 20K 256
15 JIS 30K 276
JIS 40K 276
JIS 63K 294
CA010 462 218 53 163 7.8
ASME, JPI 150 282
1/2˝ ASME, JPI 300 291
ASME, JPI 600 303
PN 10, 16 256
DN15
PN 25, 40 261
JIS 10K 299
JIS 20K 299
15 JIS 30K 319
JIS 40K 319
JIS 63K 343
CA015 512 268 65 205 8.8
ASME, JPI 150 325
1/2˝ ASME, JPI 300 334
ASME, JPI 600 347
PN 10, 16 299
DN15
PN 25, 40 305
JIS 10K 380
JIS 20K 380
25 JIS 30K 400
JIS 40K 400
JIS 63K 422
CA025 580 329 83 262 13.3
ASME, JPI 150 411
1˝ ASME, JPI 300 424
ASME, JPI 600 437
PN 10, 16 376
DN25
PN 25, 40 380
,
For specifications of other flange ratings, see the approval drawing (or customer s acceptance specification).
Fig. 5.3 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted Model (1/3)
22
L--740--28--E
Screw-in type
Screw conn. App. Weight

Model L
Connection （kg）
CA006 Rc3/8 296 5.7
CA010 Rc3/8 312 6.3
CA015 Rc3/4 382 7.1
Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W
Nom. size Flange rating kg (JIS 10K)
JIS 10K 513
JIS 20K 513
40 JIS 30K 541
JIS 40K 541
JIS 63K 585
CA040
ASME, JPI 150 547
1・1/2" ASME, JPI 300 560
ASME, JPI 600 575
PN 10, 16 507
DN40
PN 25, 40 513
710 452 121 385 23
JIS 10K 513
JIS 20K 523
50 JIS 30K 561
JIS 40K 561
JIS 63K 595
CA050
ASME, JPI 150 550
2" ASME, JPI 300 563
ASME, JPI 600 582
PN 10, 16 513
DN50
PN 25, 40 519
JIS 10K 657
JIS 20K 675
80 JIS 30K 725
JIS 40K 725
JIS 63K 771
CA080 880 602 174 510 57
ASME, JPI 150 698
3" ASME, JPI 300 717
ASME, JPI 600 737
PN 10, 16 659
DN80
PN 25, 40 675
JIS 10K 887
100 JIS 20K 899
JIS 30K 911
ASME, JPI 150 913
CA080 880 602 174 510 60
4" ASME, JPI 300 931
ASME, JPI 600 977
PN 10, 16 863
DN100
PN 25, 40 889
,
Fig. 5.4 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted Model (2/3)
23
L--740--28--E
5.1.3 CA100 thru CA250 (integrally mounted models)

230
64 127 L L
φ134 Cable entry Cable entry
60
G3/4 G3/4 Ground screw

Ground screw Ground screw
Flow direction Flow direction
Flange Flange
h2
h2
h1
h1
H
H
Boss Boss
Rc1/4 Rc1/4
A W 15 W 15
(CA100 and 150) (CA15H to 250)

Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 h2 A W
Nom. size Flange rating kg（JIS10K）
JIS 10K 992
100 JIS 20K 1006
JIS 30K 1016
ASME, JPI 150 1018
CA100 1403 1015 660 300 810 231
4˝ ASME, JPI 300 1036
ASME, JPI 600 1082
PN 10, 16 968
DN100
PN 25, 40 994
JIS 10K 1300
150 JIS 20K 1320
JIS 30K 1330
ASME, JPI 150 1318
CA150 1403 1015 660 300 810 246
6˝ ASME, JPI 300 1338
ASME, JPI 600 1388
PN 10, 16 1250
DN150
PN 25, 40 1290
JIS 10K 1015
150 JIS 20K 1055
JIS 30K 1099
ASME, JPI 150 1087
CA15H 1604 1190 851 320 810 310
6˝ ASME, JPI 300 1107
ASME, JPI 600 1157
PN 10, 16 1019
DN150
PN 25, 40 1059
JIS 10K 1330
200 JIS 20K 1368
JIS 30K 1418
ASME, JPI 150 1418
CA200 8˝ ASME, JPI 300 1438 1604 1190 851 320 810 340
ASME, JPI 600 1494
PN 10, 16 1338
DN200 PN 25 1374
PN 40 1390
JIS 10K 1330
200 JIS 20K 1368
JIS 30K 1418
ASME, JPI 150 1418
CA20H 8˝ ASME, JPI 300 1438 1830 1390 960 420 1110 610
ASME, JPI 600 1494
PN 10, 16 1338
DN200 PN 25 1374
PN 40 1390
JIS 10K 1699
250 JIS 20K 1743
JIS 30K 1805
ASME, JPI 150 1773
10˝ ASME, JPI 300 1805
CA250 1830 1390 960 420 1110 650
ASME, JPI 600 1887
PN 10 1705
PN 16 1709
DN250
PN 25 1745
PN 40 1779
,
Fig. 5.5 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted Sensor Unit (3/3)
24
L--740--28--E
5.1.4 CA006 thru CA080 (separately mounted models)
Terminal box
φ107 L
98
Cable entry G3/4 (G1/2 : TIIS)
H
Flow direction
h1
Flange
10
Ground screw
A W
Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W kg（JIS10K）
Nom. size Flange rating
JIS 10K 242
JIS 20K 242
10 JIS 30K 260
JIS 40K 260
JIS 63K 280
CA006 324 180 53 148 4.0
ASME, JPI 150 268
1/2˝ ASME, JPI 300 277
ASME, JPI 600 289
PN 10, 16 241
DN15
PN 25, 40 247
JIS 10K 256
JIS 20K 256
15 JIS 30K 276
JIS 40K 276
JIS 63K 294
CA010 362 218 53 163 4.7
ASME, JPI 150 282
1/2˝ ASME, JPI 300 291
ASME, JPI 600 303
PN 10, 16 256
DN15
PN 25, 40 261
JIS 10K 299
JIS 20K 299
15 JIS 30K 319
JIS 40K 319
JIS 63K 343
CA015 412 268 65 205 5.6
ASME, JPI 150 325
1/2˝ ASME, JPI 300 334
ASME, JPI 600 347
PN 10, 16 299
DN15
PN 25, 40 305

,
For specifications of other flange ratings, see the approval drawing (or customer s acceptance
specification).
Fig. 5.6 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted Sensor Unit (1/3)
25
L--740--28--E
Screw-in Type
L
Screw conn. App. Weight
Model L （kg）
Connection
CA006 Rc3/8 296 2.8
CA010 Rc3/8 312 3.4
CA015 Rc3/4 382 4.2
Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W
Nom. size Flange rating kg (JIS10K)
JIS 10K 380
JIS 20K 380
25 JIS 30K 400
JIS 40K 400
JIS 63K 422
CA025 480 329 83 262 10.4
ASME, JPI 150 411
12 ASME, JPI 300 424
ASME, JPI 600 437
PN 10, 16 376
DN25
PN 25, 40 380
JIS 10K 513
JIS 20K 513
40 JIS 30K 541
JIS 40K 541
JIS 63K 585
CA040
ASME, JPI 150 547
1・1/2" ASME, JPI 300 560
ASME, JPI 600 575
PN 10, 16 507
DN40
PN 25, 40 513
610 452 121 385 20
JIS 10K 513
JIS 20K 523
50 JIS 30K 561
JIS 40K 561
JIS 63K 595
CA050
ASME, JPI 150 550
2" ASME, JPI 300 563
ASME, JPI 600 582
PN 10, 16 513
DN50
PN 25, 40 519
JIS 10K 657
JIS 20K 675
80 JIS 30K 725
JIS 40K 725
JIS 63K 771
CA080 780 602 174 510 54
ASME, JPI 150 698
3" ASME, JPI 300 717
ASME, JPI 600 737
PN 10, 16 659
DN80
PN 25, 40 675
JIS 10K 887
100 JIS 20K 899
JIS 30K 911
ASME, JPI 150 913
CA080 780 602 174 510 63
4" ASME, JPI 300 931
ASME, JPI 600 977
PN 10, 16 863
DN100
PN 25, 40 889
,
specification).
Fig. 5.7 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted Model (2/3)
26
L--740--28--E
5.1.5 CA100 thru CA250 (separately mounted models)

Terminal box L L
Ground Ground screw

screw
Cable entry G3/4 Ground screw
（G1/2：TIIS）
Flow direction Flow direction
Flange Flange
h2
h2
h1
h1
H
H
Boss Boss
Rc1/4 Rc1/4
A W 15 W 15
(CA100 and 150) (CA15H to 250) Dimensions in millimeters
Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 h2 A W
Nom. size Flange rating kg（JIS10K）
JIS 10K 992
100 JIS 20K 1006
JIS 30K 1016
ASME, JPI 150 1018
CA100 1309 1015 660 300 810 231
4˝ ASME, JPI 300 1036
ASME, JPI 600 1082
PN 10, 16 968
DN100
PN 25, 40 994
JIS 10K 1300
150 JIS 20K 1320
JIS 30K 1330
ASME, JPI 150 1318
CA150 1309 1015 660 300 810 246
6˝ ASME, JPI 300 1338
ASME, JPI 600 1388
PN 10, 16 1250
DN150
PN 25, 40 1290
JIS 10K 1015
150 JIS 20K 1055
JIS 30K 1099
ASME, JPI 150 1087
CA15H 1510 1190 851 320 810 310
6˝ ASME, JPI 300 1107
ASME, JPI 600 1157
PN 10, 16 1019
DN150
PN 25, 40 1059
JIS 10K 1330
200 JIS 20K 1368
JIS 30K 1418
ASME, JPI 150 1418
CA200 8˝ ASME, JPI 300 1438 1510 1190 851 320 810 340
ASME, JPI 600 1494
PN 10, 16 1338
DN200 PN 25 1374
PN 40 1390
JIS 10K 1330
200 JIS 20K 1368
JIS 30K 1418
ASME, JPI 150 1418
CA20H 8˝ ASME, JPI 300 1438 1736 1390 960 420 1110 610
ASME, JPI 600 1494
PN 10, 16 1338
DN200 PN 25 1374
PN 40 1390
JIS 10K 1699
250 JIS 20K 1743
JIS 30K 1805
ASME, JPI 150 1773
10˝ ASME, JPI 300 1805
CA250 1736 1390 960 420 1110 650
ASME, JPI 600 1887
PN 10 1705
PN 16 1709
DN250
PN 25 1745
PN 40 1779
For specifications of other flange ratings, see the approval drawing (or customer's acceptance
specification).
Fig. 5.8 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted Sensor Unit (3/3)
27
L--740--28--E
5.1.6 High temperature service models (CA025 to CA150)

Transmitter separately mounted type/Flange connection type (CA0250, CA040, CA050, CA080)
L
A1 Lh
φ107 98
Terminal box
Cable entry
G3/4
(G1/2 : TIIS) Heat retention fluid inlet Heat retention fluid outlet
φ10 stainless steel pipe φ10 stainless steel pipe
Flow Flow
direction
H
direction
For holding heat tracer
M6 bolt
h2
h1
10
A Ground screw W Ah Wh
Sensor Unit Sensor Unit with Heat Tracer

JIS ASME, JPI DIN With Heat Tracer
App.
Nom. PN PN Weight
Model size 10K 20K 30K 40K 63K 150 300 600 10, 16 25, 40 H h1 A W Weight
kg Lh h2 Ah A1 Wh
(JIS 10K) kg
L
25
CA025 380 380 400 400 422 411 424 437 376 380 638 329 83 262 10.9 254 340 106 56 268 16.9
（1″）
High temp. service models
40
CA040 513 513 541 541 585 547 560 575 507 513 20.3 31.8
（1・1/2″）
768 452 121 385 376 464 144 70 390
50
CA050 513 523 561 561 595 550 563 582 513 519 20.7 32.2
（2″）
80
CA080 657 675 725 725 771 699 717 737 659 675 960 602 174 510 54.1 501 612 198 110 545 75.1
（3″）
Transmitter separately mounted type/Flange connection type (CA100, CA150)

L
Flange
φ107 98 App. Weight
Terminal box Model Nom. L
Flange rating kg（JIS10K）
size
Ground JIS 10K 992
Cable entry G3/4 screw
(G1/2 : TIIS) 100 JIS 20K 1006
JIS 30K 1016
Flow ASME, JPI 150 1018
direction CA100 231
4″ ASME, JPI 300 1036
Flange ASME, JPI 600 1082
PN 10, 16 968
660
DN100
1387
PN 25, 40 994
1015
JIS 10K 1300

150 JIS 20K 1320
Boss JIS 30K 1330
Rc1/4 ASME, JPI 150 1318
CA150 246
6″ ASME, JPI 300 1338
ASME, JPI 600 1388
PN 10, 16 1250
300 810 15 DN150
PN 25, 40 1290
For specifications of other flange ratings, see the approval drawing (or customer's acceptance
specification).
Fig. 5.9 Outline Dimensions of High Temperature Service Models Sensor Unit
28
L--740--28--E
5.1.7 Low temperature explosionproof service models (CA025 to CA080)

L
φ107 98
Terminal box
Cable entry G3/4 (G1/2 : TIIS)
Flow direction
H
Flange
h1
10
A Ground screw W
Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W
Nom. sizeFlange rating kg（JIS 10K）
JIS 10K 380
JIS 20K 380
25 JIS 30K 400
CA025 JIS 40K 400
（Low temp. JIS 63K 422
660 329 83 262 10.9
explosionproof ASME, JPI 150 411
service models） 1″ ASME, JPI 300 424
ASME, JPI 600 437
PN 10, 16 376
DN25
PN 25, 40 380
JIS 10K 513
JIS 20K 513
40 JIS 30K 541
CA040 JIS 40K 541
20.3
service models） 1・1/2″ ASME, JPI 300 560
ASME, JPI 600 575
PN 10, 16 507
DN40
PN 25, 40 513
790 452 121 385
JIS 10K 513
JIS 20K 523
50 JIS 30K 561
CA050 JIS 40K 561
21
ASME, JPI 600 582
PN 10, 16 513
DN50
PN 25, 40 519
JIS 10K 657
JIS 20K 675
80 JIS 30K 725
CA080 JIS 40K 725
960 602 174 510 54
ASME, JPI 600 737
PN 10, 16 659
DN80
PN 25, 40 675
,
Fig. 5.10 Outline Dimensions of Low Temperature Explosionproof Sensor Unit (1/2)
29
L--740--28--E
5.1.8 Low temperature explosionproof service models (CA100 to CA250)

L L
φ107 98 98
Terminal box
Ground Ground
Cable entry G3/4 screw Ground screw
screw
(G1/2 : TIIS)
Flow Flow
direction direction
Flange Flange
h2
h2
H
H
h1
h1
Boss Boss
Rc1/4 Rc1/4
A W 15 W 15
(CA100 and 150) (CA15H to 250) Dimensions in millimeters

Flange App. Weight
Model L H h1 h2 A W
Nom. size Flange rating kg
（JIS 10K）
JIS 10K 992
100 JIS 20K 1006
CA100 JIS 30K 1016
(Low temp. ASME, JPI 150 1018
1387 1015 660 300 810 231
explosionproof 4˝ ASME, JPI 300 1036
service models) ASME, JPI 600 1082
PN 10, 16 968
DN100
PN 25, 40 994
JIS 10K 1300
150 JIS 20K 1320
CA150 JIS 30K 1330
1387 1015 660 300 810 246
PN 10, 16 1250
DN150
PN 25, 40 1290
JIS 10K 1015
150 JIS 20K 1055
CA15H JIS 30K 1099
1588 1190 851 320 810 310
PN 10, 16 1019
DN150
PN 25, 40 1059
JIS 10K 1330
200 JIS 20K 1368
JIS 30K 1418
CA200
ASME, JPI 150 1418
(Low temp.
8˝ ASME, JPI 300 1438 1588 1190 851 320 810 340
explosionproof
ASME, JPI 600 1494
service models)
PN 10, 16 1338
DN200 PN 25 1374
PN 40 1390
JIS 10K 1330
200 JIS 20K 1368
JIS 30K 1418
CA20H
ASME, JPI 150 1418
(Low temp.
8˝ ASME, JPI 300 1438 1814 1390 960 420 1110 610
explosionproof
ASME, JPI 600 1494
service models)
PN 10, 16 1338
DN200 PN 25 1374
PN 40 1390
JIS 10K 1699
250 JIS 20K 1743
JIS 30K 1805
CA250 ASME, JPI 150 1773
(Low temp. 10˝ ASME, JPI 300 1805
1814 1390 960 420 1110 650
service models) PN 10 1705
PN 16 1709
DN250
PN 25 1745
PN 40 1779

,
specification).
Fig. 5.11 Outline Dimensions of Low Temperature Expiosionproof Sensor Unit (2/2)
30
L--740--28--E
5.1.9 Ferrule fitting type (integrally and separately mounted models,

low temp. explosionproof service models)
● Integrally mounted type
230
64 127
φ134
Cable entry
60
G3/4
φD
Flow direction
H
Ferrule
h1
10
W
A Ground screw L
Ferrule fitting App. Weight
Model L H h1 A W φD
Nom. size Connection kg
CA006 10 Ferrule 10A 231.5 424 180 53 148 34 5.7
CA010 15 Ferrule 15A 256 462 218 53 163 34 6.3
CA015 15 Ferrule 15A 289 512 268 65 205 34 7.1
Ferrule 25 (ISO)
CA025 25 IDF 1S 370 580 329 83 262 50.5 10.7
CA040 40 Ferrule 38 (ISO) 50.5

IDF 1.5S
493 710 452 121 385 19
Ferrule 51 (ISO)
CA050 50 IDF 2S 64
CA080 80 Ferrule 76.1 (ISO) 658.5 880 602 174 510 91 51

IDF 13S
Process connection: A in mm; S (sanitary) in inches.
Fig. 5.12 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted, Ferrule Type Sensor Unit
31
L--740--28--E
● Separately mounted type

Cable entry G 3/4
Terminal box φ107 L L
（G1/2：TIIS）
98 φ107 98
Cable entry G3/4

(G1/2 : TIIS)
109
H
H
φD
Flow direction
φD
Ferrule
h1
h1
10
A W
10
Ground screw
A W Ground screw
Model L H h1 A W φD kg
Nom. size Connection
CA003 10 Ferrule 10A 265 230 67 89.1 192 34 4.5
CA006 10 Ferrule 10A 231.5 324 180 53 148 34 2.8
CA010 15 Ferrule 15A 256 362 218 53 163 34 3.4
CA015 15 Ferrule 15A 289 412 268 65 205 34 4.2
CA025 25 Ferrule 25 (ISO) 370 480 329 83 262 50.5 7.8
IDF 1S
Ferrule 38 (ISO)
CA040 40 IDF 1.5S 50.5
493 610 452 121 385 16
CA050 50 Ferrule 51 (ISO) 64
IDF 2S
CA080 80 Ferrule 76.1 (ISO) 658.5 780 602 174 510 91 48
IDF 13S
Process connection: S (sanitary) in inches.
Fig. 5.13 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted, Ferrule Type Sensor Unit
● Low temp. explosionproof service models (CA025 to CA080）

L
φ107 98
Terminal box
Cable entry G3/4（G1/2：TIIS）
Flow direction
φD
Ferrule
h1
10
A Ground screw W
Model L H h1 A W φD kg
Nom. size Connection
Ferrule 25（ISO）
CA025 25 370 660 329 83 262 50.5 8.3
service models
Low temp. explosionproof
IDF 1S
CA040 40 Ferrule 38（ISO） 50.5
IDF 1.5S
493 790 452 121 385 17
CA050 50 Ferrule 51（ISO） 64
IDF 2S
CA080 80 Ferrule 76.1（ISO） 658.5 960 602 174 510 91 48
IDF 3S
Process connection: S (sanitary) in inches.
Fig. 5.14 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted, Ferrule Type（Low temp. explosionproof service models）Sensor Unit
32
L--740--28--E
5.2 Type S
5.2.1 Stainless steel tube type (integrally and separately mounted models)
● Integrally mounted models
230
64 127
φ134
Cable entry
60
G3/4
H
C
Flow direction
φF E
φG L
L
Nom. App. Weight
Model JIS ASME/JPI H C φF φG E
size kg (JIS 10K)
10K 20K 150
CS010 15（1/2˝） 426 452 458 390 340 5 16.8 69 10
CS015 15（1/2˝） 464 490 496 390 340 7.4 16.8 80 11
CS025 25（1˝） 529 555 570 423 353 12.4 26.6 88 18
CS040 40（1・1/2˝） 716 733 749 439 359 17.8 40.4 112 28
CS050 50（2˝） 882 906 919 474 372 26.4 52.6 153 38
CS080 80（3˝） 1032 1046 1073 510 392 38 77.8 176 69
,
specification).
Fig. 5.15 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted Model
● Separately mounted models

Cable entry
Terminal box φ107 G3/4 (G1/2:TIIS)
C
Flow direction
φF E
φG
L
L
Nom. App. Weight
Model JIS ASME/JPI H C φF φG E
size kg (JIS 10K)
10K 20K 150
CS010 15（1/2˝） 426 452 458 246 197 5 16.8 69 7
CS015 15（1/2˝） 464 490 496 246 197 7.4 16.8 80 8
CS025 25（1˝） 529 555 570 280 210 12.4 26.6 88 15
CS040 40（1・1/2˝） 716 733 749 296 216 17.8 40.4 112 25
CS050 50（2˝） 882 906 919 332 229 26.4 52.6 153 35
CS080 80（3˝） 1032 1046 1073 367 249 38 77.8 176 66
,
specification).
Fig. 5.16 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted Sensor Unit
33
L--740--28--E
5.2.2 Titanium tube type (integrally and separately mounted models）

● Integrally mounted models
230
64 127
Cable entry
φ134
60
G3/4
C
H
Flow direction
E
φF
230 φG L
64 127 Dimensions in millimeters

L App. Weight
Nom.
Model JIS ASME/JPI H C φF φG E kg
size Cable entry
φ134
10K 20K 150 (JIS 10K)

60
φ107 G3/4
CS010 Terminal
10（1/2"）
box 426 452 458 390 340 6.3 11.4 69 10
CS015 15（1/2"） 464 490 Cable
496 entry 390 340 9.3 16.8 80 11
G3/4
CS025 25（1"） 529 555 570 423 353 15.4 26.6 88 18
C
H
CS040 40（1・1/2"） 716 733 749 439 359 22.3 40.4 112 28
C
CS050 50（2"） 882 906 919 474 372 30.5 52.6 153 38
H
CSR50 80（3"） 1032 1046 1073 474 372 30.5 77.8 153 40
Flow
Flowdirection
direction ,
For specifications of other flange ratings, see the approval
EE
drawing (or customer s acceptance
specification). φFφF LL
φG
φG
Loose flange is applied.
Fig. 5.17 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted, Titanium Tube Type
● Separately mounted models
φ107
Terminal box
Cable entry
G3/4
C
H
Flow direction
E
φF
L
φG
L App. Weight
Nom.
Model JIS ASME/JPI H C φF φG E kg
size
10K 20K 150 (JIS 10K)
CS010 10（1/2"） 426 452 458 246 197 6.3 11.4 69 7
CS015 15（1/2"） 464 490 496 246 197 9.3 16.8 80 8
CS025 25（1"） 529 555 570 280 210 15.4 26.6 88 15
CS040 40（1・1/2"） 716 733 749 296 216 22.3 40.4 112 25
CS050 50（2"） 882 906 919 332 229 30.5 52.6 153 35
CSR50 80（3"） 1032 1046 1073 332 229 30.5 77.8 153 37
,
specification).
Loose flange is applied.
Fig. 5.18 Outline Dimensions of separately mounted models, Titanium Tube Type
34
L--740--28--E
5.2.3 Ferrule fitting type (integrally and separately mounted models)

● Integrally mounted type
230
64 127
φ134
60
Cable entry
C
H
G3/4
Ferrule fitting
φD
Flow direction
E
Model Nom.size L H C E φD App. Weight (kg)
CS010 15mm ※1 426 390 340 69 34 8
CS015 15mm 464 390 340 80 34 9
CS025 1・1/2S 529 423 353 88 50.5 16
CS040 2S 716 439 359 112 64 24
CS050 2・1/2S 882 474 372 153 77.5 36
CSR50 3・1/2S 1032 474 372 153 106 38
CS080 Optionally available. Consult the factory.
NOTE: ※ 1：10mm for the titanium tube type.
※： Ferrule connections of models CS010 and CS015 comply with
ISO2852.
　※： Nominal size S: Inch Sanitary version
Fig. 5.19 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted, Ferrule Type
● Separately mounted type

Cable entry
φ107 G3/4 (G1/2:TIIS)
Terminal box
Ferrule fitting
H
C
H
C
φD
Flow direction
E
Model Nom.size L H C E φD App. Weight (kg)
CS010 15mm ※1 426 246 197 69 34 5
CS015 15mm 464 246 197 80 34 6
CS025 1・1/2S 529 280 210 88 50.5 13
CS040 2S 716 296 210 112 64 21
CS050 2・1/2S 882 332 229 153 77.5 33
CSR50 3・1/2S 1032 332 229 153 106 35
CS080 Optionally available. Consult the factory.
NOTE: ※ 1：10mm for the titanium tube type.
※： Ferrule connections of models CS010 and CS015 comply with
ISO2852.
　※： Nominal size S: Inch Sanitary version
Fig. 5.20 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted, Ferrule Type
35
L--740--28--E
5.3 Type B
5.3.1 Integrally mounted models
230
64 127
φ134
Cable entry
60
G3/4
Flange
Ferrule fitting
h2
φD
Flow
h1
direction
Ground
（h1）
screw
（H）
A L L
※: Dotted lines show sensor unit envelops of CB040 and 050.
JIS ASME/JPI App. Weight
Model Nom. size 10K 20K 30K 150 300 600 H h1 h2 A kg
L L （JIS 10K）
CB006 10（1/2˝） 343 343 361 369 378 390.5 354 94 192 59 7.3
CB010 15（1/2˝） 380 380 400 406 415 427.5 350 94 189 59 7.6
CB015 15（1/2˝） 486 486 506 512 521 533.5 441 168 206 91 11.6
CB025 25（1˝） 569 569 589 601 613 626 436 175 194 91 14.2
CB040 40（1・1/2˝） 626 626 654 660 673 688.5 588 323 197 125 32.8
CB050 50（2˝） 626 636 674 663 676 695 588 323 197 125 33.2

,
specification).
Ferrule fitting
Model App. Weight
Process connection L φD (kg)
CB006 Ferrule 10A 333 34 5.2
CB010 Ferrule 15A 380 34 6.1
CB015 Ferrule 15A 476 34 9.9
CB025 Ferrule 25 (ISO), IDF 1S 559 50.5 11.1
CB040 Ferrule 38 (ISO), IDF 1.5S 606 50.5 29.3
CB050 Ferrule 51 (ISO), IDF 2S 606 64 29.3
Fig. 5.21 Outline Dimensions of Integrally Mounted Model
36
L--740--28--E
5.3.2 Separately mounted models
φ107
Terminal box
98
Flange
Cable entry Ferrule fitting
G3/4 (G1/2:TIIS)
H
φD
Flow direction
h1
（h1）
（H）
Ground screw
A L L
※: Dotted lines show sensor unit envelops of CB040 and 050.

JIS ASME/JPI App. Weight
Model Nom. size 10K 20K 30K 150 300 600 H h1 A kg
L L （JIS 10K）
CB006 10（1/2˝） 343 343 361 369 378 390.5 257 94 59 4.7
CB010 15（1/2˝） 380 380 400 406 415 427.5 254 158 59 5.0
CB015 15（1/2˝） 486 486 506 512 521 533.5 345 168 91 9.0
CB025 25（1˝） 569 569 589 601 613 626 340 175 91 11.6
CB040 40（1・1/2˝） 626 626 654 660 673 688.5 491 323 125 30.2
CB050 50（2˝） 626 636 674 663 676 695 491 323 125 30.6

,
specification).
Ferrule fitting
Model App. Weight
Process connection L φD (kg)
CB006 Ferrule 10A 333 34 2.6
CB010 Ferrule 15A 380 34 3.5
CB015 Ferrule 15A 476 34 7.3
CB025 Ferrule 25 (ISO), IDF 1S 559 50.5 8.5
CB040 Ferrule 38 (ISO), IDF 1.5S 606 50.5 26.7
CB050 Ferrule 51 (ISO), IDF 2S 606 64 26.7
Fig. 5.22 Outline Dimensions of Separately Mounted Sensor Unit
37
L--740--28--E
5.4 Separately Mounted Transmitter

● Stanchion mounting
344 230
46 233 127 103
61.7 171.5
100
Stanchion (2”
)
60
30
4-M6×8
30
φ134
60
188
67
Hold-down
hardware
(2”
×1)
60
125
Cable entry G3/4 Cable entry G3/4 50 64

7
※ Hold-down hardware are supplied as standard accessories, but the customer is to furnish the stanchion.
Fig. 5.23 Outline Dimensions of Transmitter
6. INSTALLATION
6.1 Installation Guidelines
(1) Select a location easy to access for inspection and maintenance.
(2) Avoid a location subject to excessive temperature variation and vibration.
(3) Avoid direct exposure to the sun. (Provide a sunshade or similar protection to keep the meter out of
exposure to direct sunlight if necessary.)
(4) Avoid a location where immersion in water is a possibility.
(5) Select a location free from an atmosphere of corrosive gases.
(6) Location should be free from dust and mist.
(7) Separate at least one meter from sources of electromagnetic induction, such as large transformers
and motors. Also, keep the meter away as far as possible from the sources of severe vibration,
such as motors and pumps.
(8) To ensure consistent and accurate measurement, adhere to the instructions in 6.2 Physical
Orientation, 6.3 Installation Location, 6.4 Installation Guidelines, and 6.6 Installing Proper Pipe
Supports.
(9) The Coriolis flowmeter requires an installation location where pipeline oscillation is held below
0.3G to ensure consistent and accurate measurement. External vibration (including pulsation)
particularly with the same frequency as the drive frequency of the measuring pipe may affect the
measurement. Contact OVAL regarding drive frequency of each model.
(10) Locate the control valve downstream of the flowmeter.
Where cavitation is likely to occur, install the flowmeter at least five meters away.
38
L--740--28--E
6.2 Physical Orientation

6.2.1 Type U physical orientation
(1) The sensor may be installed either in a horizontal run or vertical run. The following physical
orientations are suggested, depending on the type of process fluid. [Orientation (2) shows the
typical orientation for liquids.]
(2) If cable entry points upwards, there must be adequate provisions for sealing off or preventing
rainwater and other moisture from entering the meter.
● CA003 thru CA250

Horizontal pipeline
Vertical pipeline
(1) (2)
Physical orientation
IN IN
IN
Gas Liquid Liquid

Applicable
● ● ●
Slurries Gas
fluids
● ●
(If deposit buildup is likely.) ● Liquids that require cleansing
● Liquids that tend to foam
Fig. 6.1
(3) Transmitter orientation is correct if its display face is not in the horizontal plane.
View from side View from bottom View from top
Fig. 6.2
(4) For the orientation of separately mounted transmitter, see 6.9 Separately Mounted Transmitter
Installation.
39
L--740--28--E
● CA00A and CA001

Installation on a bench or wall are acceptable. We recommend the following orientations:
◆ Installation on a bench ◆ Installation on a wall
4-φ9 Fitting hole
(Fits M8 bolt.)
Fig. 6.3
NOTE: For wall mounting, secure the body with bolts, making use of sensor unit fitting holes.
6.2.2 Type S physical orientation

NOTE: Please refer to Item-13 for EHEDG
Horizontal line Vertical line
Authentication Article. OUT
(1) The flowmeter may be installed either

in a horizontal line or a vertical line.
(2) Where cleansing is required or where
air bubble entrapment is likely, we
suggest installation in a vertical run.
(3) If cable entry points upwards, take
necessary measures to prevent rain IN OUT
and water from entering the meter.
IN
Fig. 6.4
(4) Transmitter installation is correct if its display face is not in the horizontal plane.
Fig. 6.5
Installation.
40
L--740--28--E
6.2.3 Type B physical orientation

(1) The flowmeter may be installed either
Horizontal line Vertical line
in a horizontal line or a vertical line.
OUT
(2) Where cleansing is required or where
air bubble entrapment is likely, we
suggest installation in a vertical run.
(3) If cable entry points upwards, take
necessary measures to prevent rain
IN OUT
and water from entering the meter.
IN
Fig. 6.6
(4) Transmitter installation is correct if its display face is not in the horizontal plane.
Fig. 6.7
Installation.
41
L--740--28--E
6.3 Installation Location

Because air bubbles in the flow tube produce a loss of meter accuracy, avoid the following installation or
practice.
● Locating the flowmeter at the highest point in the piping system.
● In a vertical piping system, directly discharging the metered fluid from the piping system without the
provision of a valve or similar controlling device.
(While Type U meter is used in the installation examples below, the same applies to Types S and B.)
① Avoid installing on the suction side of a pump. ④ For vertical installation, avoid routing the outlet pipe
as shown in the diagram below.
In cases where such installation is unavoidable,
install a valve for gas venting.
Gas vent valve
Isolate
sufficiently
from pump
vibration.
P Pump
② If the flowmeter is to be installed at the highest point

of the process, make sure that gas is not retained in
the pipeline.
Installation of valves for gas venting is recommended.
Gas vent valve
⑤ Where hydrostatic head is used.

on
Take precaution
against bubble
entrapment when
liquid level is low.
③ To prevent cavitation, avoid installation at the outlet
which is open to the atmosphere.
In cases where such installation is unavoidable due
to limited space, install a valve on the outlet side.
Do not allow air
bubbles.
Orifice Keep filled with liquid.
Pressure control, full-

liquid control valve
Open !!
Fig. 6.8
42
L--740--28--E
6.4.1 Standard piping conditions

(1) A Coriolis mass flowmeter is unaffected by the flow pattern of process fluid. Basically, therefore,
it does not require any flow straightener. However, connection to a piping with different diameter
should be done using a concentric reducer or tapered pipe.
(2) Locate the meter sufficiently away from sources of vibration and pulsations.
(3) For use in zeroing, a valve that can shut off the process flow completely should be provided
downstream of the meter. (For maintenance purposes, installation of another valve upstream of the
meter is recommended.)
(4) Avoid giving pipe stress on the sensor.
Type U standard piping conditions

(While Type U meter is used in the installation examples below, the same applies to Types S and B.)
Flow direction arrow

Valve Valve
Flow direction
Fig.6.9
CAUTION: This meter is designed for flange mounting. It should be supported on the part
of the pipeline. Do not support the sensor body.
Although models CA00A and CA001 are designed to be sensor-body mounting,
make sure to provide the piping support both upstream and downstream of
the meter.
43
L--740--28--E
6.4.2 Influence of vibration and pulsation

Generally, Coriolis mass flowmeters can best perform in measurements with least pipeline vibration and
pulsation. In applications where vibration and pulsation are not negligible, the following considerations
must be taken into account:
(1) Locate the meter sufficiently away from the sources of vibration and pulsation.
(2) Provide attenuators, such as flexible tubes and chambers. However, if these elements are caused to
vibrate by the drive of the flowmeter, take measure such as keeping these elements away from the
flowmeter to avoid zero shifts.
(3) Close shutoff valves upstream and downstream of the meter at process flow shutdown. (This is
to prevent erratic signal generation at shutoff. Bear in mind, however, to prevent pressure buildup
inside from exceeding the max. allowable pressure of the meter.)
(4) If meters of the same kind are to be installed in the same pipeline, locate them sufficiently apart (at
least five times the face-to-face dimension of the meter).
6.4.3 Prevention of cavitation

Cavitation can cause a loss of meter accuracy in measurement. Maintain line pressures that will not cause
cavitation upstream and downstream of the meter for this reason. Avoid making such an arrangement
as to open the line to the atmosphere immediately downstream of the meter. Care must be exercised
particularly in handling liquids of high steam pressure.
In practice, recommended minimum backpressure (downstream pressure) of the meter is calculated by
the formula:
Pd = 3ΔP + 1.3Pv
where 　Pd: Downstream pressure (MPa [absolute])
ΔP: Pressure loss across the flowmeter (MPa)
Pv: Steam pressure of the liquid at the temperature of measurement (MPa [absolute])
6.4.4 Prevention of excessive flows

CAUTION: Exceeding the meter's maximum flowrate will not significantly reduce the
meter's long term durability. Bear in mind, however, that the output will be
clamped at 110% of the allowable full scale flowrate.
6.4.5 Prevention of gas mixed flows

Slug flows (gases exist in the process liquid) are generally not measurable at a high degree of accuracy.
It also causes erratic pulse generation at shutdown of the flow.
This transmitter is capable of detecting gas mixed flows. On finding the result of densitometer
measurement exceeding 0.3 to 2g/mL (default setting for liquid measurement), the meter interprets it as a
slug flow and reduces the instant flowrate to zero, interrupting the flow output.
For gas measurement, default setting is 0 to 10g/L so that gas mixed flow detection function is disabled.
For details about setting and operation of the gas mixed flow detection function, see 9.17 Gas Mixed Flow
Alarm.
6.4.6 Keeping the sensor filled with process liquid

CAUTION: The sensor must be filled with the process fluid during measurement.
A partially filled meter results in large errors particularly at zeroing.
[Reference]
For models CA100 to CA250 installed on the horizontal pipeline, it is difficult to wash away air bubbles in
the flow tube at flow rates below 10% of Max. service flow rate (water used as the metered fluid). In such
cases, run the fluid at flow rate greater than 10% of Max. service flow rate first, then adjust the flow rate
to the required rate.
Even with the flow rate greater than 10% of Max. service flow rate, it will take approx. 40 seconds to
completely fill the flow tube from its empty state (water used as the metered fluid).
Expansion of the process fluid due to freezing may damage the measuring pipe. Take measures to
prevent process fluid from freezing.
44
L--740--28--E
6.4.7 Bypass loop

To facilitate maintenance and servicing, providing a bypass loop is recommended.
● Type U (CA003 to CA250), Type S, and Type B
Flow direction Valve Valve
Bypass loop Valve
Fig. 6.10
● Type U (CA00A and CA001)

Flow direction
Valve Valve
Bypass loop Valve
Fig. 6.11
45
L--740--28--E
6.5.1 Flange type

(1) In order to avoid strains on sensor flanges, be sure to correct the flange face-to-face dimension, tilt
and off-center alignment of pipes immediately before and after the sensor.
(2) Make sure of the flow direction by referring to the flow direction plate.
(3) Align the sensor flange O.D. with the flange O.D. of the pipeline, install gaskets, and tighten hex
bolts evenly.
CAUTION: Remove, before installation, protective seals on sensor flanges that are
attached before shipment from factory.
Gasket Gasket
IN OUT
Hex Bolt Flow Direction Arrow
※ While Type U meter is used in the figure, the same applies to Types S and B.
Fig.6.12
CAUTION
Models CA100 and CA150 weigh approx. 250kg,
CA15H and CA200 weigh 340kg, CA20H and Eyebolt Eyebolt
CA250 weigh 650kg (JIS 10K flange connection).
Obviously, there is high risk with installation IN OUT
(removal) of this equipment. Therefore, we
,
suggest you, for safety s sake, to leave this work
to authorized personnel experienced in sling
work and crane operation (observing applicable
regulations).
Shown in Fig. 6.13 is the center of gravity of Center
equipment. When working with a vertical run of gravity
in particular, carefully review proper slinging
position, etc. with its weight and center of gravity
in mind.
Incidentally, two M20 (CA100 to CA200) eyebolts*1
(made of SUS304) are installed in the housing Fig. 6.13
of sensor unit (two places). Since eyebolts can
become loose and come off with time due to
vibration, it is good practice to retighten firmly or
remove upon installation in the piping assembly.
*1: M24 eyebolts are used for CA20H and CA250.
46
L--740--28--E
6.5.2 Sanitary fitting type

The sanitary fitting type is of clamp connections.
Using pipe fittings (option), install according to the Clamp
procedure given below.
Gasket ※
(1) Welding the companion sleeve (weld ferrule)
Weld the companion sleeves furnished to the Butt Weld
piping. Pay attention to the perpendicularity of Sensor
Body
ferrule end face and difference in height at the
weld.
As piping material, use JIS G 3447 "Stainless
Steel Sanitary Tubes".
(2) Installation Piping
Companion
Sandwich the gasket between the sensor and Sleeve
(weld joint ferrule)
ferrule and tighten with the clamp. Be sure to
※ Option
install the gasket in line with the groove in the
ferrule end face before tightening up. Fig.6.14
6.5.3 Screw-in type

(1) CA00A and CA001
Install a screw fitting (R1/4) onto the piping, fit an O-ring between the end of piping and the gland of
sensor unit, and then tighten them firmly.
Inlet (outlet)
Piping
Gland flat
R1/4
Piping Screw fitting
Nut
O-ring
Gland union
Gland union body Gland union detail

Sensor unit
Fig.6.15
CAUTION 1. Be careful to avoid damaging the gland flat and the protrusion of flow inlet
(outlet).
2. Exercise care not to overtighten the nut. Overtightening it can damage the
gland flat.
(2) CA003 to CA015

O-ring
Sandwich an O-ring between the probe and
Gland Union fitting
union fitting and tighten.
Body
Fig.6.16
47
L--740--28--E
6.6 Installing Proper Pipe Supports

If pipeline oscillation is large or for accurate measurement on low flows, take into account the following:
(1) Provide pipe supports in the range shown below preferably with pipes clamped arranged
symmetrically both upstream and downstream of the sensor.
(2) Clamp the pipeline securely without using rubber bushings or similar cushioning material intended
for the absorption of shock and vibration.
(3) While it is necessary that the rigidity of clamps supporting upstream and downstream piping,
pedestal, floor, etc. that hold individual supporting members be sturdy enough to bear their weight,
it is more important to secure and maintain the overall rigidity of the entire structure. In large sized
installations in particular, changes in the spring elements present in the area surrounded by dot lines
in Fig. 6.18 due to exposure to thermal stress, line pressure, shocks, aging, and other contributing
factors can cause zero shifts.
CAUTION: Support the pipeline with hold-down clamps; never hold down the sensor unit.
6.6.1 Type U pipe supports

● CA003 to CA080 D: Nominal pipe size
3 to 20D 3 to 20D
Pipe support Pipe support
Valve
IN OUT
Fig.6.17
● CA100 to CA250 D: Nominal pipe size
1.5 to 10D 1.5 to 10D

Valve
IN OUT
High rigidity of structure

in the area surrounded Pedestal or floor
by dot lines is desirable.
Fig.6.18
48
L--740--28--E
6.6.2 Type S pipe supports
D: Nominal pipe size
3 to 10D 3 to 10D
Valve
IN OUT
Fig.6.19
6.6.3 Type B pipe supports
D: Nominal pipe size
3 to 10D 3 to 10D
Valve
IN OUT
Fig.6.20
49
L--740--28--E
6.7 Heat and Cold Retention Procedures

When the fluid to be measured requires temperature retention at low or high temperature, you can keep
the sensor unit at high or low temperature. Here, correct heat retaining and cold retaining methods are
described.
(1) When installing heat retaining or cold retaining material on the sensor unit, apply heat retention or
cold retention to only main body. As the fluid passes through the sensor case, heat retention or
cold retention on the mounting tube and terminal box has no effect. Especially, in the case of high
temperature type and low temperature explosionproof type, do not install heat retaining or cold
retaining material within a distance of 20mm from the mounting tube so that the terminal box is
protected against heat (heat and cold) (see Fig. 6.22).
(2) For easy maintenance, a simplified heat retaining system is recommended on the sensor unit.
(3) When covering the heat insulating material with outer sheath for heat retention or cold retention,
if the natural frequency of the outer sheath is close to the frequency of the tube oscillating in the
sensor unit *1, it may possibly cause some effect on the measurement.
(4) Careful attention should be paid to the maximum permissible temperature when steam trace is
applied. Trace temperature should be the same as that of the metered fluid. (⇒ See 3.1 Sensor
Unit General Specifications).
(5) If you plan to spirally wind copper tubing or similar around the sensor unit, secure the copper tubing
with pipe retainers shown in Figs. 6.21 through 6.25 - and spot weld the copper tubing to the sensor
unit.
(6) Use of heat tracer is recommended for CA025, CA040, CA050, and CA080 of TypeU.
*1：The frequency band for CA100 to CA250 will be 70 to 100Hz.
NOTE: Vibrating copper tubing caused by the flowmeter in operation can produce zero shifts. In such
a case, increasing the number of fixed points is one solution that will work.
NOTE: To minimize transmission of oscillation to the sensor, the spirally wound copper tubing should
start and end at the manifold of flanged sensor housing.
NOTE: Sudden temperature change may damage the performance of the flowmeter. Keep the
temperature change of the fluid within ±12℃ /min. for both heating and cooling.
CAUTION: 1. Do not use electric heaters which could be a source of noises.
2. If ambient temperature around the transmitter is expected to exceed 55°
C,
separately mounted type is recommended.
6.7.1 Type U
● CA00A, CA001 and CA003
Terminal box
Piping
Copper tubing Steam Spot weld
Copper tubing
Pipe retainer (material SUS strip)

Sensor unit
〔CA00A, CA001〕〔CA003〕
Fig.6.21
50
L--740--28--E
● High temperature service models

● CA006 to CA080
CA025 to CA150
● Low temperature explosionproof service models
Transmitter 　CA025 to CA250
Manifold
Piping
Spot weld Do not apply heat retention to terminal box
and mounting tube.
20mm min.
Copper
tubing
Pipe retainer
Apply heat retention only to the
(material SUS strip)
main body.
Manifold
Fig.6.22
● CA100 to CA250
Terminal box
Adapter Piping
Manifold Spot weld

Copper tubing
Manifold Pipe retainer (material SUS strip)
Sensor unit
Fig.6.23
6.7.2 Type S 6.7.3 Type B

Piping
Transmitter
Spot weld
Transmitter Piping
Spot weld
Copper
tubing Pipe retainer
Copper tubing
(material SUS strip)
Sensor unit
Pipe retainer
(material SUS
strip)
Titanium Sensor unit Titanium

Manifold Manifold
※ Please note that the SUS strips cannot be spot-welded to the stub
ends and parts of the neck since these parts are made of titanium.
Fig.6.24 Fig.6.25
51
L--740--28--E
6.8 A Boss for Pressure Relief device － Its Use

ALTImass Type U for high pressure service is
provided with a boss (Rc 1/4) to house a pressure
relief device. Intended to release internal pressure
on a rare occasion of tube rupture caused by a
,
process pressure buildup exceeding the tube s
permissible pressure (Fig. 6.26).
Since the permissible pressure the sensor housing
can withstand is lower than that of the tube, should
an emergency occur with tube rupture, the housing
of sensor unit might eventually be damaged
depending on the process conditions. Boss
Prior to shipment from the factory, a hex socket
head plug (R 1/4) is screwed in the female taper
pipe thread (Rc 1/4) of the boss. You may, for Fig.6.26 A boss to house a pressure
added security to protect the housing against relief device
damage, install a pressure switch or relief valve in
the boss.
WARNING: The housing of sensor unit is filled with an inert gas; do not attempt to
remove the hex socket head plug unless it is absolutely necessary.
6.9 Separately Mounted Transmitter Installation

(1) The maximum transmission cable length varies with the type of sensor unit: locate the transmitter
within this range.
(2) Secure the transmitter to a horizontal or vertical steel pipe 2 inches in nominal size using the U-bolt
furnished as standard accessories.
(3) Installation location should be accessible for maintenance and in good environment.
(4) The customer to furnish the stanchion (steel pipe).
CAUTION
Avoid installation in such location as
① Difficult to access for maintenance and servicing.
② Excessive temperature changes and vibration.
③ Potential immersion in water.
Installation on a vertical pipe

Hold-down hardware ※
U-bolt
(2˝×1) ※
※: U-bolt, hold-down hardware and bolts

are standard accessories.
Fig.6.27
52
L--740--28--E
6.10 How to Change Transmitter Orientation

WARNING: Be sure to turn off power before you start working.
To change transmitter orientation, follow the steps given below:

(1) Turn off power.
(2) Make preparations for conduit and cable so that they will by no means cause you any trouble while
changing transmitter orientation.
Work on a level plane with the transmitter up and the sensor secured so that loosening bolts will not
cause the transmitter to come off.
(3) Loosen bolts holding the transmitter adapter with hex wrench. See Fig. 4.10 (M8 hex socket head
screws at four places).
WARNING: Never loosen the hex socket head screws located on the
transmitter body.
WARNING: You may loosen bolts but never separate the transmitter from
the sensor unit.
(4) Rotate the transmitter to the desired position and secure it with setscrews (four places).
Transmitter rotatable over an arc of 180°max.
Loosen four hex socket head screws (M8) at the

adapter and change the transmitter orientation.
M8 Setscrew
Never loosen these screws (4 places)
located on the transmitter body.
Fig.6.28
CAUTION
The transmitter may be rotated over an 180°arc as shown in Fig. 6.28. But rotating it
beyond 180°will twist the harness from the sensor unit to the extent the equipment is
damaged.
(5) Confirming that the transmitter is secured in place, make conduit and wiring connections.
(6) Verify that the flowmeter operates properly.
53
L--740--28--E
WARNING: With CS sensor unit, do not attempt to adjust orientation with hex
socket head bolts shown in the figure below, or its functions as a
flowmeter will be lost.
Do not remove socket

head bolts.
Fig.6.29
6.11 How to Change Transmitter Display Orientation

The transmitter display may be rotated through 360 in steps of 90°within the housing.
WARNING: Be sure to turn off power and discharge your static electricity before you
work.
① Remove the locking part. ② Using a flat tool 10mm wide ③ Disengage the hooks (3 places).
approx., turn the display lid (Recommended tool: Precision
counterclockwise to loosen, flathead screw-driver)
and loosen further by hand. (Be
careful so as not to damage the
finish.)
Fig.6.30 Fig.6.31 Fig.6.32
54
L--740--28--E
④ Loosen display unit fitting screws (3 places) with ⑤ Separate the display unit.
precision flathead screwdriver. "Set washers" to
prevent screws from falling out are attached on the
back of display; do not completely remove screws.
Fig.6.33 Fig.6.34
LCD fitting screws

Set washers (3 places) (M2.6, 3 places)
Fig.6.35
⑥ For the display unit that has just been removed, it is necessary to take off fitting screws once, adjust the
orientation and re-install them. Shown below are the location of screw holes for different orientations.
A B
C
C
A.B A
A B C
Liquid service, Vertical run Gas service,
horizontal run horizontal run
B.C
Fig.6.36
55
L--740--28--E
Connector
pins Display
unit
Depending on through
the transmitter holes
type, shapes of
the connector or
peripheral parts
may be different.
⑦ Align connector pins (male) on the transmitter with ⑧ Tighten screws (3 places) at new screw holes and re-
mating through holes (female) in the display unit. install into the original position.
Fig.6.37 Fig.6.38
CAUTION: When tightening the display lid, tighten securely using a flat tool or similar
instrument. Insufficient tightening can affect gas-tightness and sensitivity of
,
display s optical switch.
56
L--740--28--E
7. WIRING INSTRUCTIONS
7.1 Wiring Connections
7.1.1 Power and output signal connections (both integrally and separately mounted models)
(1) Terminals for wiring connections are found at the back of transmitter housing. Remove the cover
and make wiring connections.
① Using hex wrench, take off latch fitting screw (M3 hex ② Using a flat tool, slowly turn the terminal box lid
socket head). counterclockwise to loosen and then loosen by hand.
(Use care to avoid damaging the finish.)
Fig.7.1 Fig.7.2
Replaceable fuse Power terminal block

250V, 2A (M4 screws)
Status input/output
terminal block Ext. GND terminals
Analog output and pulse

Communication signal output terminal block (M3.5
terminal block screws)
Fig.7.3
③ Removing the terminal box cover provides access to the cable entry and the power board
holding the power and output signal terminal blocks. The customer is to furnish crimp style
terminals required for power and output signal wiring connections.
Power terminal block for crimp terminals: Round shaped 8.1mm max. O.D. for M4
Output signal terminal block for crimp terminals: Round shaped 7.2mm max. O.D. for M3.5
Status in/out terminal block and communication signal terminal block are of screwless type
and require no crimp style terminals.
57
L--740--28--E
7.1.2 Connections between separately mounted sensor unit and transmitter

Terminals for wiring connections with the sensor unit are found on the side of transmitter housing.
Remove the cover and make wiring connections.
① Using a flat tool, loosen the separately mounted ② Separating the separately mounted sensor cover
sensor cover by slowly turning it counterclockwise provides access to the terminal block (screwless
and further counterclockwise by hand until it comes terminal block) for the sensor.
off. (Be careful to avoid damaging the finish.)
Fig.7.4 Fig.7.5
NOTE: About jumper on sensor terminal block in Fig. 7.5.

NOL
Do not move the jumpers J1-1 and J1-2 from their

J2
C1
default positions (see the figure on the left).

J1-2
J1-1
COUP
7.2 Power Supply Lines and Ground Terminal

(1) Power source primary lines are connected to
terminals L (＋) and N (－).
(Overvoltage Category II, Pollution Degree 2.)
(2) Connection to earth ground terminal:
Connect only to GND on the power terminal
block or external ground terminal. External ground
terminal
CAUTION: Supply voltage must be within

the range shown in the
product nameplate attached
to the housing. Fig.7.6
7.3 Analog Output Wiring

When analog output (4 to 20mA) is to be connected to a receiving instrument, Analog Output 1 has
terminals A1 (＋) and terminal A1 (－) while Analog Output 2 has terminal A2 (＋) and terminal A2 (－).
Maximum load resistance is 600Ω. Analog output setup procedure appears in 9.7.1 Analog output
functions.
※ Analog output will be invalid if FOUNDATION Fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA is selected as communication
interface.
58
L--740--28--E
7.4 Pulse Output Wiring

When pulse output is to be connected to a receiving instrument, Pulse Output 1 has terminals P1 (＋) and
terminal P1 (－) while Pulse Output 2 has terminal P2 (＋) and terminal P2 (－).
If voltage pulse signal is your option, signal transmission length has restrictions on output frequency.
Output frequency Max. transmission length ※

10kHz 10m
1kHz 100m
100Hz 1000m
※ Values are based on wire material 0.75 sq in cross section.

To change from voltage pulse output to open drain pulse output, or vice versa, remove the front lid and
select jumper positions as indicated below.
JP3 Pulse output 1 jumper

OPEN: Open drain pulse
CLOSE: Voltage pulse
JP4 Pulse output 2 jumper

OPEN: Open drain pulse
CLOSE: Voltage pulse
Fig.7.7
Pulse output setup procedure appears in 9.7.2 Analog output.

※ Pulse output will be invalid if FOUNDATION Fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA is selected as communication
interface.
7.5 Status Output Wiring

Status output appears across terminals S.O. (＋) and S.O. (－).
Status output setup procedure appears in 9.7.3 Status output.
※ Status output will be invalid if FOUNDATION Fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA is selected as communication
interface.
59
L--740--28--E
7.6 Status Input Wiring

Status input appears across terminals S.I. (＋) and S.I. (－).
Status input setup procedure appears in 9.7.4 Status input.
※ Status input will be invalid if FOUNDATION Fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA is selected as communication
interface.
7.7 Communication Line Wiring (option)

For communications (option), use terminals I/O. (＋) and I/O. (－).
CAUTION: 1. Bell202 HART communications protocol does not use these terminals. It
uses analog output 1 terminal.
2. Other communication interfaces require different handling. Please refer to
the supplementary communication manuals.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus communication: "ALTImass series communication
manual for FOUNDATION Fieldbus L-740FF"
PROFIBUS PA communication: "ALTImass series communication manual
for PROFIBUS PA L-740PB"
Modbus communication: "ALTImass series communication manual for
Modbus L-740CM"
7.8 Recommended Cables Condition

Recommended condition
Item Label Rating voltage/ Maximum

allowable current Cross-section Solderless terminals operating
(at 30℃) temp.
L (＋)
1.25sq to 2.0sq R-type, 8.1mm less
Power N (－) 300V over, 2A over
AWG14 to 16 Size: M4
GND
A1 (＋)
A1 (－)
A2 (＋)
A2 (－) R-type, 7.2mm less
P1 (＋) Size: M3.5
P1 (－) 0.75sq to 2.0sq
Signal AWG14 to 18
P2 (＋) ※1 60℃ over
100V over, 0.1A over
P2 (－) ※2
S.I. (＋)
S.I. (－)
S.O. (＋) Need no Screwless
S.O. (－) terminal type
I/O (＋) 0.75sq
Communication
I/O (－) AWG18
Directly wiring or
External 4sq over Solderless terminal
600V over, 40A over
ground AWG12 over
(R-type, 8.1mm less)
NOTE: ※1 Please select the cable size to be used with the number of signals.
※2 Depending on the number of output signals used, selection for the right cable material
must be made referring to the table on the next page.
60
L--740--28--E
Recommended cable condition for FOUNDATION Fieldbus and PROFIBUS communication

Max. cable Specific Association- OVAL-
Cable specification Size Impedance Attenuation
length resistance recommended recommended
Type A 18AWG
Twisted pair cable 1900m 100Ω 22Ω/km 3dB/km ○ ○
(pair shielded) 0.8mm2
Type B 22AWG
Twisted pair cable 1200m 100Ω 56Ω/km 5dB/km ○
(common shielded) 0.32mm2
Type C 26AWG
Twisted pair cable 400m no regulation 132Ω/km 8dB/km ○
(unshielded) 0.13mm2
Type D 16AWG
Straight through cable 200m no regulation 20Ω/km 8dB/km ○ ○
(common shielded) 1.25mm2
Source: IEC 61158-2："Digital data communications for measurement and control – Fieldbus for use
industrial control systems – Part 2 : Physical layer specification and service definition"
NOTE: Placeable cable lengths vary depending on actual field conditions. For the details, refer to the
documents listed below:
・"PROFIBUS PA Technology and Application"
・FOUNDATION Fieldbus Application Guide AG-140; "Wiring and Installation; 31.25 kbit/s,
Voltage; Model,Wire Medium"
Recommended cable condition for Modbus communication

Cable specification Size Max. cable length
Twisted pair 0.75mm2 1200m (depends on operation environment)
Applicable rubber packing size for wire lines and sizes

Recommended wire size
2sq 1.25sq 0.9sq 0.75sq Remarks
Cable packing gum ID.
φ8.1 to φ9.0 2 2 2 2 FOUNDATION Fieldbus,
φ9.1 to φ10.0 2 2 2 2 PROFIBUS PA Communication cable
φ10.1 to φ11.0 2 3, 4 6, 7 6, 7
φ11.1 to φ12.0 3, 4 5 8 8
φ12.1 to φ13.0 5 6 10, 12 10, 12
φ13.1 to φ14.0 6 7, 8 －－
NOTE: Use shreld cables.
7.9 Terminal Identification of Separately Mounted Transmitter

Item Terminal Terminal Terminal Description
name No. color
1AB BRN
Flow tube drive output
2AB RED
TB20
Sensor unit to transmitter
BRN/RED, GRN/WHT, BLU/GRY, PUR/ORG/YEL shielded wires

3AB BLK
(200 meters max.) ※
bundled
interconnect cable
1AB PUR Temperature input (inner)

2AB ORG Temperature input (outer)
3AB YEL Temperature input
TB21 4AB BLU
Right position pickoff sensor input
5AB GRY
6AB WHT
Left position pickoff sensor input
7AB GRN
NOTE: ※: Maximum lengths of the cable are: 50m for Type S stainless steel tube type, 100m for
Type S titanium tube type, and 5m for Type B sensors.
61
L--740--28--E
7.10 Wiring Diagram

7.10.1 Transmitter power and output signal wiring
Power terminals
Replaceable fuse 250V, 2A
Status in/out terminals
Ext. GND terminals
Analog and pulse

output terminals
Remote output terminals
● Terminal identification and description

Item Label Description Remarks
A1（＋）
Analog output 1 (4 to 20mA) 1. Max. load resistance is 600Ω
A1（－） for analog output 1 and 2.
A2（＋）
Analog output 2 (4 to 20mA) 2. Pulse output (voltage
A2（－）
pulse) transmission length is
P1（＋） Pulse output 1 Max. 10m (at 10kHz)
P1（－） (voltage/open drain output) Max. 100m (at 1kHz)
P2（＋） Max. 1km (at 100Hz)
Pulse output 2
finished O.D: 0.75sq
P2（－） (voltage/open drain output)
Signal
S.I.（＋） 3. These input and output signals
Status input (drain input)
S.I.（－） are invalid for FOUNDATION
S.O.（＋） Fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA and
Status output (open drain output) Modbus communications.
S.O.（－）
I/O（＋） Modbus communication：Max.trans-
mission length1200m at 0.75sq
Expanded in/out FOUNDATION Fieldbus or
I/O（－） (Modbus communication, etc.) PROFIBUS PA communication:
Max. transmission length 1900m at
0.8sq
L（＋） Power (with DC power: +)
Power GND Earth ground
N（－） Power (with DC power: –)
Fig.7.8
Conduct earth grounding work at external ground terminal or "GND" on the power terminal block (Grade
D grounding work).
CAUTION: In case supplying electric power to this flowmeter, do not fail to connect a
protective fuse of rated voltage 2A max.
62
L--740--28--E
7.10.2 Separately mounted sensor unit and transmitter wiring
Transmitter
Sensor terminal box
Interconnect cable (Max. 200m)
Interconnect cable
TypeU： 200m max.
Barrier cover to be applied
in a hazardous area Cut off shield wires here except for the TypeS Stainless steel tube type： 50m max.
CA00A, CA001, CA004 shield wire over BRN and RED lines. TypeS Titanium tube type： 100m max.
and CA006 to CA080 Shield TypeB： 5m max.
(T2, T3 and T4) are not (Protected by black tube)
required.
Shield wires:Black
Brown Brown
Red Red
Green Green
White White
cut
Blue Blue
Grey Grey
cut
Purple Purple
Yellow Yellow
Orange Orange
Sensor terminal box cut

Transmitter terminal box
Shield
(Protected by black tube)
NOTE 1. Do not fail to use dedicated interconnect cable.

2. Shield wire preparation シールド
（黒色チューブで保護）
(1) Transmitter end :
As shown in the above figure,
茶 bundle shield wires colored
茶 in brown/red, green/white,
blue/grey, purple/yellow/orange,
赤 twist them, and cover the赤wires with a black tube. Then
connect only one wire to the terminal box (black) taking care to avoid potential contact
with the housing or conductive
緑 parts. 緑
白白
(2) Sensor end :
カット
As shown in the figure, cover the brown/red shield wire with a black tube and connect it
青青
to the terminal box taking care
灰 to avoid potential contact 灰
with the housing or conductive
parts. Clip all shield wires
カット except brown/red as shown in the above figure.
　　　 3. Recommended cable end treatment:
紫
黄
紫
黄
Use of a stick type crimp terminal
橙 is not necessary. 橙
9mm
カット
Fig.7.9
63
L--740--28--E
7.11 How to Change Cable Entry Orientation of Terminal Box (Separately Mounted Type)
Of the sensor unit, the orientation of the terminal box’
s cable entry can be changed.
NOTE: Although the terminal box can be rotated by loosening four hex-socket head screws at the
adapter, the following procedure must be followed.
CAUTION: Rotating the terminal box without following the procedure will cause sensor
damage.
◆Procedure◆
① Turn OFF flowmeter power.
② Using a flat tool, slowly loosen the terminal box lid by turning
counterclockwise, and loosen further by hand.
(Be careful not to damage the finish.)（Fig.7.10）
Fig.7.10
Inside, the structure of terminal block can be either A or B shown below. Follow procedure ③～⑤
according to the type of your terminal block.
Terminal block A Terminal block B
③ Remove the isolation

Isolation cover Isolation cover
cover.
（Fig.7.11, Fig.7.12）
Fig.7.11 Fig.7.12
④ Disconnect the cables

from the terminal block.
（Fig.7.13, Fig.7.14）
Fig.7.13 Fig.7.14
64
L--740--28--E
Terminal block A Terminal block B
⑤ Remove screws from

terminal block. (3 places for
A, 2 places for B)
※ Make sure not to drop or
lose screws.
（Fig7.15, Fig.7.16）
Fig.7.15 Fig.7.16
⑥ Remove caution label (sticker) and loosen hex-socket head

screws (4 places).（Fig.7.17, Fig.7.18）
⑦ Rotate terminal box without exerting excessive force onto

sensor cables.
⑧ After rotating, reassemble terminal box in reverse procedure.
Fig.7.17
Fig.7.18
65
L--740--28--E
8. OPERATION
8.1 Flushing the Piping Assembly
If scale and sludge are expected to be left in the piping assembly, particularly in a new piping assembly,
flush the assembly prior to sensor unit installation.
8.2 Confirming the Sensor Unit for Correct Installation

,
For safety s sake, confirm connecting bolts to tightness and gaskets for condition. Make certain of flow
direction at the same time.
8.3 Leak Check

Fill the sensor tube completely with process fluid and check for any leak from connections.
8.4 Supplying the Power

Upon completion of checks for correct wiring connections, supply power. The LCD will show the following
information:
Corporate logo is shown.
Self diagnostics begins.

If nothing unusual is found, "OK" appears at right of
each item, bringing up the next window.
(If NG appears, running a check on that item is
required.
See 9.6.3 Transmitter Check, correct the condition, and
turn on power again.)
Variable view and measurement begins.
8.5 Measurement Line Startup

By starting up the pump, opening valves, etc., carefully allow the process fluid to flow.
8.6 Warm-up
,
To ensure stability of the measuring conditions of equipment, provide about 20 minutes warmup period.
(A message "WARMUP 20" stays on after startup. The number shows remaining time (min).)
8.7 Zeroing Procedure

On seeing that the measuring conditions have come to an equilibrium, shut off the downstream valve
completely. Make a zeroing adjustment under these conditions (see the topic under 9.8 Zeroing).
8.8 Readying for Operation

Now preparation for operation is complete. Initiate measurement.
66
L--740--28--E
9. DESCRIPTION OF INCORPORATED FUNCTIONS

9.1 Display
9.1.1 Description of display
②
③
RED LED LED GRN LED
"SEL" switch "ENT" switch
(1) LCD top row (①)

Shows measurements. Other variables also can be shown with switches. (An example at above shows
instant mass flowrate and instant volume flowrate. For details of displayed variables, see 9.1.3 View
variables.)
(2) LCD middle row (②)

Shows an error / status message.
For error messages, see 10.1 Error Messages and 10.2 Status Messages. If more than two messages
exist, they are shown one after another.
(3) LCD bottom row (③)

In the view variables screen, an arrow appears, pointing to the direction of scroll. By reversing the
arrow direction, you can reverse the direction of scroll. (For details, see 9.1.3 View variables.)
A black circle ● may blink on and off at right of arrow. (It indicates that the number of running hours
has exceeded 100,000. For necessary treatment, see 10.2 Status Messages.)
(4) Red LED and green LED

Similar to messages, these LED show the status of flowmeter.
In normal operation, red LED stays off; green LED stays on.
Anything else is indicative of occurrence of something erratic.
See 10.1 Error Messages and 10.2 Status Messages.
(5) "SEL" and "ENT" switches

An infrared switch. Responds to a finger held close to it.
For operating procedure, see 9.1.2 Switch operation.
NOTE: If the infrared sensors do not respond sufficiently, use LinkTop to adjust the sensitivity.
In case you do not have LinkTop, use a reflecting subject, such as a sheet of paper,
to operate the switches.
67
L--740--28--E
9.1.2 Switch operation

The transmitter has two infrared switches: "SEL" and "ENT". Operation of these switches is described
here. For information about parameter configuration and other functions, see the respective sections.
(1) "ENT" operation
This switch is used for scrolling the display, scrolling the cursor, etc.
Here we cover "ENT" operation as an example of switching variables view screens.
① Touch ENT key at lower right of screen over glass faceplate with
your finger.
When the key responds, a down arrow ▼ appears at lower right of
screen (surrounded by a dotted circle) where nothing was found
as shown in the next screen.
② After down arrow comes on for 0.5 sec, arrow ▼ is highlighted as

shown in the following screen.
③ While the highlighted arrow stays on (0.5s), remove your finger.
Arrow ▼ goes out and the screen changes.
(With your finger held on, you can continue "ENT" operation. It is
beneficial for fast scroll.)
④ End of "ENT" operation
The next screen appears.
(2) "SEL" operation

This operation is used to switch screen direction, increasing the number, parameter select, etc. Here
we cover "SEL1" operation as an example of switching screen direction.
① Touch SEL key at lower left of screen over glass faceplate with
your finger.
When the key responds, a letter S appears at right bottom of
screen (surrounded by a dotted circle) where nothing was found
as shown in the next screen.
② After letter S comes on for 0.5 sec, the letter S appears highlighted
as shown in the following screen.
③ While the highlighted S stays on (0.5s), remove your finger.

Letter S goes out and arrow ↓at bottom left of screen changes to ↑.
(With your finger held on, you can continue "SEL" operation. It is
beneficial for quickly increasing the number.)
④ End of "SEL" operation
Arrow ↓ has changed to ↑.
Operating "ENT" in this state allows the screen to scroll in the
opposite direction.
68
L--740--28--E
(3) "SEL3" operation

This operation is used to finalize the numeric value that has been changed and activate it, etc.
Here we cover "SEL3" operation as an example of switching to MODE SELECT menu screen.
① Touch SEL key at lower left of screen over glass faceplate with
your finger.
When the key responds, a letter S appears in the highlighted S3
area at lower right of screen.
(On certain screens, letter S3 may appear at lower center of
screen.)
② Hold you finger on.

After letter S comes on for 0.5 sec, the letter S appears highlighted
as shown in the following screen.
③ While holding your finger on, the screen repeats a change between
highlighted and unhighlighted.
On the third appearance of highlighted S (duration 0.5 sec),
remove your finger. A switch to MODE SELECT menu screen
takes place.
④ End of "SEL3" operation

A switch to MODE SELECT menu screen is complete.
9.1.3 View the variables

(1) Description of displayed information
Shown below is a flow diagram with CA sensor (default settings).
At right of each screen is the description of information displayed in the screen.
The window changes from one screen to another with switch operation. Repeat touching the switch
until the desired screen appears.
…… ● Mass Flow: Instant mass flowrate

Decimal point placement is alterable by config. (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (1) [No. 1-3-4-1].)
Units of measure are alterable by config. (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-1-1].)
…… ● Vol Flow or Vol Flow(s): Instant volume flowrate
Decimal point placement is alterable by config. (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (1) [No. 1-3-4-2].)
Units of measure are alterable by config. (See9.2.3 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-1-2].)
Click "ENT". Click "ENT". If fixed density is your option, Vol Flow(s) appears.
(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑) Below 0.3g/m in density, volume flow is clamped to 0.
…… ● Density: Fluid density
Decimal point placement is alterable by configuration. (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (1) [No. 1-3-4-3].)
Units of measure are alterable by config. (See 9.2.3 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-2-1].)
…… ● Temp: Fluid temperature
Units of measure are alterable. (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-3-1].)
Click "ENT". Click "ENT".
(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑)
…… ● Counter 1: The number of counts of pulse output 1.
When reading exceeds "99999999", it resets to 0.
The reading is retained irrespective of power cycling.
Can be reset to 0 with Count/Total 1 reset function. (See 9.2.7 Transition chart (6) [No.3-5-1].)
……
If pulse output 1 related parameter is modified, the counter is reset to 0.
● Counter 2: The number of counts of pulse output 2.
When reading exceeds "99999999", it resets to 0.
The reading is retained irrespective of power cycling.
Click "ENT". Click "ENT". Can be reset to 0 with Count/Total 2 reset function. (See 9.2.7 Transition chart (6) [No. 3-5-2].)
(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑) If pulse output 2 related parameter is modified, the counter is reset to 0.
69
L--740--28--E
…… ● Totalizer 1: Total flow of pulse output 1

When reading exceeds the max. value, the counter resets to 0 with the next count.
Unit of measure keeps track of the flow unit assigned to pulse output 1.
Decimal point pos. is alterable by configuration (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (1) [No. 1-3-4-4].)
This reading is retained irrespective of power cycling.
Can be reset to 0 with Count/Total 1 reset function. (See 9.2.7 Transition chart (6) [No. 3-5-1].).
…… ● Shows Totalizer 2: Total flow of pulse output 2
Click "ENT". Click "ENT". When reading exceeds the maximum reading, it returns to 0 at the next count.
(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑) Unit of measure keeps track of the flow unit assigned to pulse output 2.
Decimal point pos. is alterable by configuration. (See 9.2.2 Transition chart (1) [No. 1-3-4-5].)
This reading is retained irrespective of power cycling.
Can be reset to 0 with Count/Total 2 reset function. (See 9.2.7 Transition chart (6) [No. 3-5-2].).
When pulse output 2 related parameter is modified, the counter is reset to "0".
…… ●
Ana. Output 1: % analog output 1
Measurement range: －10 to 110%
…… ● Ana. Output 2: % analog output 2
Measurement range: －10 to 110%

(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑)
…… ● Status / error information
Not shown unless there are errors or status information.
For errors and status information, see 10.1 Error Messages and 10.2 Status Messages.

(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑)
…… ● MODE SELECT screen: A screen to enter the setup screen.

Parameter configuration and utilizing various functions starts from this screen.

(※1 with ↓) (※1 with ↑)
Back to the initial screen.
※1: Scroll direction can be changed by reversing the arrow direction at lower left with "SEL1".
(See "SEL1" operation in 9.1.2 Switch operation (2).)
(2) To change the style of view variables

・Display/hide of individual items and their priority can be changed.
(For details, see 9.11 Variables view screen setup.)
・Display font size can be changed.
In default setting, alphanumeric is displayed in large fonts; two items appear in one screen. By
selecting the standard font, it is possible to indicate 3 items in one screen.
(For details, see 9.2.2 Transition chart (1) [No. 1-3-3].)
70
L--740--28--E
9.2 View Parameters and Description

Numerous parameters and functions are incorporated in this transmitter.
In 9.2.1 Setup menu window, procedures to bring up MODE SELECT menu screen, the initial screen to
show menu items, are covered. For explanation of individual parameters, see 9.2.2 Transition chart.
9.2.1 View the setup menu

To reconfigure parameters, etc., it is necessary to bring up the MODE SELECT menu screen at first.
The following is the procedure:
CAUTION: Notes on Write Protect mode

Write protect mode is a factory preset mode which restricts parameter changes
or executing functions related to measurement accuracy, performance, and
measurement values of this device to prevent posing problems in case the device
is used for custody transfer, etc.
If the target parameter is changed or the function is executed when the device
is set to Write Protect mode, the message "Write protect" ("Write protected" on
LinkTop) is displayed on the LCD screen or screen of communication terminal
such as LinkTop and the operation is not accepted. For the target parameters of
Write Protect mode, refer to the note "*1" shown in sections 9.2.2 to 9.2.7.
Write Protect mode cannot be set or canceled by customer. If setting/canceling of
this mode is required, please contact the distributor you purchased the product.
(1) Bringing up "MODE SELECT" screen

Repeat "ENT" operation until "MODE SELECT" screen appears.
(For detail of operation, see 9.1.2 Switch operation.)
Shown at left is the "MODE SELECT" screen.
(2) Operation on menu view

Click "SEL3". A switch to "MODE SELECT menu" screen takes place.
(If password is enabled, a password setup screen appears.)
Operate "SEL3".
(See 9.5 Password Function which will guide you the rest of the way.)
★ Password is not set. ★ Password is set.
Password setup screen

For the rest of the way, see 9.5 Password
Functions.
3) "MODE SELECT" menu screen appears.

From this screen, you are ready to configure parameters and to run various
functions.
For view parameters and description, see the respective item in 9.2.2 thru 9.2.7
Transition charts.
To return to the normal screen without proceeding to setup process, operate

"ENT" 4 times and select Exit.
Operate "ENT" 4 times. Then, operate "SEL1" to return to the normal screen.
Operate "SEL1".
(4) Normal screen appears.
CAUTION: If no command arrives within 5 minutes at "Mode Select" menu screen, it

returns to the normal window.
71
L--740--28--E
9.2.2 Transition chart of view (1)

："SEL1" operation
MODE SELECT
："SEL3" operation (For operating procedure, see 9.1.2 Switching operation.)
："ENT" operation
1.Password & Disp 1.Password Set

※1
2.Setup 2.Password
3.Diag/Service 3.Process Var. 1.Var. Priority
4.Maintenance 2.Refresh LCD
3.Font
4.Decimal Place 1.Mass Flow
2.Vol Flow
3.Density
4.Totalizer1
5.Totalizer2
Exit Exit
4.Back Light
Exit Exit
Process screen
NOTE: ※1：For this function, the setting change is disabled in Write Protect mode (refer to section 9.2).
72
L--740--28--E
No. Item Description Setup Default

Selects password active/inactive. With "ON" selected, entering a password is requested before entering
1-1 Password Set setup menu screen from "MODE SELECT" screen. This prevents unauthorized password change. See 9.4 Off
For details of password, see 9.5 Password Function.
Sets a password. To validate the setting, password function in [No. 1-1] requires to be turned "ON".
1-2 Password See 9.3 9999
A precaution to remember: If password is forgotten, there will be no way to change parameters.
Selects run indicator display/hide and priority of variables view.

1-3-1 Var. Priority See 9.11
For details, see 9.1.1 Variables view screen setup.
Changes LCD display refresh rate (ms). Select one from 1: 100ms, 2: 200ms, 3: 500ms, 4: 1000ms, or 5:
1-3-2 Refresh LCD 2000ms. Select a slower rate if the reading changes too fast, making it difficult to read; select a faster rate if See 9.4 500ms
prompt readout is desired.
Changes LCD font size.
1-3-3 Font 1: Double angle ⇒ Larger font, allowing 2 variables view in one screen. See 9.4 Double
2: Normal ⇒ Smaller font, allowing 3 variables view in one screen.
Changes dcml pt. pos. in LCD instant mass rate. Select one that matches instant mass rate used. Select
from 1: Auto ⇒ Auto (from 5th dcml. plc. to no fractions, 2: Integer ⇒ No fractions, 3: 1st decimal ⇒ to 1st
1-3-4-1 Mass Flow See 9.4 Auto
dcml place, 4: 2nd decimal ⇒ to 2nd dcml plc., 5: 3rd decimal ⇒ to 3rd dcml plc., 6: 4th decimal ⇒ to 4th
dcml plc.
Changes dcml pt. pos. in instant volume rate on LCD. Select one that matches instant mass rate used.
1-3-4-2 Vol Flow Select from 1: Auto ⇒ Automatic, 2: Integer ⇒ No fractions, 3: 1st decimal ⇒ to 1st dcml place, 4: 2nd See 9.4 Auto
decimal ⇒ to 2nd dcml plc., 5: 3rd decimal ⇒ to 3rd dcml plc., 6: 4th decimal ⇒ to 4th dcml plc.
Changes LCD decimal point position in density. Set to match the viscosity used. Selectable from 1: Auto ⇒
1-3-4-3 Density Automatic, 2: Integer ⇒ No fractions, 3: 1st Decimal ⇒ to 1st dcml place, 4: 2nd Decimal ⇒ to 2nd dcml See 9.4 4th Decimal
place, 5: 3rd Decimal ⇒ to 3 rd dcml place, 6: 4th Decimal ⇒ to 4th dcml place.
Changes LCD decimal point position in total flow 1. Set to match the total flow 1 used. Selectable from 1:
1-3-4-4 Totalizer1 Auto ⇒ Automatic, 2: Integer ⇒ No fractions, 3: 1st Decimal ⇒ to 1st dcml place, 4: 2nd Decimal ⇒ to 2nd See 9.4 Auto
dcml place, 5: 3rd Decimal ⇒ to 3rd dcml place, 6: 4th Decimal ⇒ to 4th dcml place.
Changes LCD decimal point position in total flow 2 on LCD. Set to match the total flow 1 used. Selectable
1-3-4-5 Totalizer2 from 1: Auto ⇒ Automatic, 2: Integer ⇒ fractions eliminated, 3: 1st Decimal ⇒ to 1st dcml place, 4: 2nd See 9.4 Auto
Decimal ⇒ to 2nd dcml place, 5: 3rd Decimal ⇒ to 3 rd dcml place, 6: 4th Decimal ⇒ to 4th dcml place.

Selects backlight mode. (In an erratic condition, it stays on or blinks depending on its nature.)
1: Off: Backlight stays off.
2: Sleep 5 min: Stays on for 5 min before it goes out. Sleep
1-4 Back Light 3: Sleep 10 min: Stays on for 10 min before it goes out. See 9.4
20min
4: Sleep 20 min: Stays on for 20 min before it goes out.
5: Sleep 30 min: Stays on for 30 min before it goes out.
73
L--740--28--E

："SEL1" operation
MODE SELECT ："SEL3" operation (For operating procedure, see 9.1.2 Switching operation.)
："ENT" operation
1.Password & Disp 1.Flow Param 1.Mass Unit
2.Setup 2.Vol Unit

※1
3.Diag/Service 3.Flow Damp
4.Maintenance 4.Flow Cutoff
5.Flow Direct
Exit
2.Dens Param 1.Dens Unit
2.Dens Damp
3.Slug Low
4.Slug High
5.Slug Duration
6.Special Dens 1.Dens Compen
2.Std Temp
3.Exp Coef
4.Settled Dens
5.Dens Value
Exit Exit
3.Temp Param
1.Temp Unit
4.Outputs
2.Temp Damp
5.Status Input
Exit
6.H/L Alarm
Exit Exit
Process screen
74
L--740--28--E
2-1-1 Mass Unit Selects instant mass flowrate unit. For available units of measure, see 9.18 Available setup units. See 9.4 kg/min
Units of flowrate-related views and settings keep track of the units selected.
2-1-2 Vol Unit Selects unit of instant volume flowrate. For available units of measure, see 9.18 Available setup units. See 9.4 L/min
Flowrate-related units of measure and settings keep track of the units selected.
Changes instant flowrate damping factor (sec).

2-1-3 Flow Damp If flowrate fluctuates excessively, select a larger value; if fast response is desired, select a smaller value (0 See 9.3 0.8
to 200 sec).
Changes cutoff (%) of instant mass rate. With respect to the cutoff rate multiplied by max. allowable instant
mass rate and cutoff rate, instant rate is clamped at 0 within the range where － cutoff rate < instant mass
2-1-4 Flow Cutoff rate < ＋cutoff rate. If flowrate fluctuates excessively, select a larger value; if measurement down to small See 9.3 0.3
flows is desired, select a smaller value (0 to 5%).
Changes flow direction.
1: Forward ⇒ ＋ flow when the fluid runs in the flow direction of sensor; － flow if the fluid runs opposite to
2-1-5 Flow Direct the flow direction of sensor. See 9.4 Forward
2: Reverse ⇒ － flow when the fluid runs in the flow direction of sensor; ＋ flow if the fluid runs opposite to
the flow direction of sensor.

Selects density unit.
2-2-1 Dens Unit For available units of measure, see 9.18 Available setup units. See 9.4 g/ml
The unit of density-related views and settings keep track of the unit selected.
2-2-2 Dens Damp Changes density damping factor (sec). See 9.3 4.0
If density fluctuates excessively, select a larger value; if fast response is desired, select a smaller value.
Sets lower limit density (low end in normal density) for slug flow detection. Liquid: 0.3
2-2-3 Slug Low See 9.3
Set a value smaller than expected flow density. Gas: 0
Sets higher limit density (high end in normal density) for slug flow detection. Liquid: 2
2-2-4 Slug High See 9.3
Set a value larger than expected flow density. Gas: 10
Sets the duration required for detecting slug flows. During the preset duration, if measured density falls
2-2-5 Slug Duration below lower limit density [No. 2-2-3] or exceeds upper limit density [No. 2-2-4], it is identified as slug flow to See 9.3 0
indicate an alarm.
Sets enable/disable of reference temp. conversion function on density.
1: Off ⇒ Reference temp. conv. function disabled. 2: On ⇒ Ref. temp. conv. function is activated based on
2-2-6-1 Dens Compen the following formula and the obtained dens. value is used in the view and output, etc. See 9.4 Off
Dens. after ref. temp. conv. = Measured dens. ＋ {ref. temp. conv. factor [No. 2-2-6-2]×(fluid temp. － ref.
temp. [No. 2-2-6-2])}
2-2-6-2 Std Temp Changes the ref. temperature (° C) of the ref. temperature conversion function. See 9.3 20.00
The setting is valid when selection [No. 2-2-6-1] of ref. temperature conversion function is active.
2-2-6-3 Exp Coef Changes ref. temp. conversion factor in the ref. temp. conversion function. See 9.3 0.00024
The setting is valid when selection [No. 2-2-6-1] of ref. temperature conversion function is active.
Sets enable/disable of fixed density function.

1: Off ⇒ Fixed density function is inactive.
2-2-6-4 Settled Dens 2: On ⇒ Irrespective of density measurement, the fixed density [No. 2-2-6-5] is reflected in the output. (True See 9.4 Off
density is displayed as density value.)
(With On selected, vol flow is suffixed with (s) to avoid confusion with true density volume output.
Changes fixed density (g/ml) of fixed density function.

2-2-6-5 Dens Value The setting is valid when selection [No. 2-2-6-4] of fixed density function is active. See 9.3 1.0000

Selects temperature unit of measure.
2-3-1 Temp Unit For available units, see 9.18 Available setup units. See 9.4 ℃
The unit of temperature-related views and settings keeps track of the unit selected.
Changes temperature damping factor (sec).

2-3-2 Temp Damp If temperature varies widely, select a larger value; if fast response is desired, select a smaller value. See 9.3 4.0
75
L--740--28--E

："SEL1" operation
："ENT" operation
1.Password & Disp 1.Flow Param 1.Ana. Output1 1.Assign
2.Setup 2.Den Param 2.URV

※1
3.Temp Param 3.LRV
4.Outputs 4.Lowcut
5.Added Damp
Exit
2.Ana. Output2 1.Assign
2.URV
3.LRV
4.Lowcut
5.Added Damp
Exit
3.Pls. Output1 1.Assign
2.Freq Factor
3.Rate Factor
4.Lowcut
Exit
4.Pls. Output2 1.Assign
2.Freq Factor
3.Diag/Service 5.Status Input 5.Status Output 3.Rate Factor
4.Maintenance 6.H/L Alarm 6.Error Output 4.Lowcut
Exit Exit Exit Exit
Process screen
76
L--740--28--E

Changes analog output 1 assignment. (See 9.13 Analog Output Function.)
2-4-1-1 Assign If assignment is changed, reconfigure upper limit [No. 2-4-1-2], lower limit [No. 2-4-1-3], low cutoff [No. 2-4- See 9.4 Mass Flow
1-4], and damping factor [No. 2-4-1-5] for optimum settings.
Changes analog output 1 upper limit. A 20mA output is produced at the value so set.
2-4-1-2 URV A value smaller than lower limit [No. 2-4-1-3] and a value larger than max. allowable range are not See 9.3 180.000
acceptable.
Changes analog output 1 lower limit. A 4mA output is produced at the value so set.
2-4-1-3 LRV A value larger than upper limit [No. 2-4-1-2] and a value larger than the max. allowable range are not See 9.3 0.00000
acceptable.
Changes analog output 1 low cutoff (%).
2-4-1-4 Lowcut When low flow cutoff is greater than proportion of analog output where upper limit [No. 2-4-1-2] is set at See 9.3 0.0
100% and lower limit [No. 2-4-1-3] at 0%, analog output is clamped at 4mA.
Changes analog output 1 damping factor (sec).
2-4-1-5 Added Damp If analog output 1 fluctuates excessively, select a larger value; if fast response is desired, select a smaller See 9.3 0.0
value.

Changes analog output 2 assignment. (See 9.13 Analog Output Function.)
2-4-2-1 Assign If assignment is changed, reconfigure upper limit [No. 2-4-2-2], lower limit [No. 2-4-2-3], low cutoff [No. 2-4- See 9.4 Mass Flow
2-4], and damping factor [No. 2-4-2-5] for optimum settings.
Changes analog output 2 upper limit. A 20mA output is produced at the value so set.
2-4-2-2 URV A value smaller than lower limit [No. 2-4-2-3] and a value larger than the max. allowable range are not See 9.3 180.000
acceptable.
Changes analog output 2 lower limit. A 4mA output is produced at the value so set.
2-4-2-3 LRV A value larger than upper limit [No. 2-4-2-2] and a value larger than the max. allowable range are not See 9.3 0.00000
acceptable.
Changes analog output 2 low cutoff (%).
2-4-2-4 Lowcut When low flow cutoff is greater than proportion of analog output where upper limit [No. 2-4-2-2] is set at See 9.3 0.0
100% and lower limit [No. 2-4-2-3] at 0%, analog output is clamped at 4mA.
Changes analog output 2 damping factor (sec).
2-4-2-5 Added Damp If analog output 2 fluctuates excessively, select a larger value; if fast response is desired, select a smaller See 9.3 0.0
value.

Changes pulse output 1 assignment. (For functions, see 9.12 Pulse Output Function.)
2-4-3-1 Assign If assignment is changed, reconfigure frequency at full scale [No. 2-4-3-2], full scale flowrate [No. 2-4-3-3], See 9.4 Mass Flow
and low cutoff [No. 2-4-3-4] for optimum settings.
Changes the max. frequency of pulse output 1. An output is produced at the frequency (duty 50%) set at
2-4-3-2 Freq Factor full scale [No. 2-4-3-3]. Set up to match the measuring frequency range of instrument used for pulse output See 9.3 1000.0
measurement.
Changes pulse output 1 full scale flowrate.

2-4-3-3 Rate Factor See 9.3 180.000
An output is produced at the max. frequency [No. 2-4-3-2] when preset flowrate is reached.
Changes low cutoff (%) of pulse output 1.

2-4-3-4 Lowcut When proportion of flowrate falls below low cutoff where full scale flowrate [No. 2-4-3-3] is set at 100%, the See 9.3 0.0
pulse output is clamped at 0.

Changes pulse output 2 assignment. (For functions, see 9.12 Pulse Output Function.)
2-4-4-1 Assign If assignment is changed, reconfigure frequency at full scale [No. 2-4-4-2], full scale flowrate [No. 2-4-4-3], See 9.4 Mass Flow
and low cutoff [No. 2-4-4-4] for optimum settings.
Changes the max. frequency of pulse output 2. An output is produced at the frequency (duty 50%) set at full
2-4-4-2 Freq Factor scale rate [No. 2-4-4-3]. (If double pulse output is your option at pulse output 2 assignment [No. 2-4-4-1], See 9.3 1000.0
this setting becomes invalid, however.)
Changes pulse output 2 full scale flowrate. An output is produced at max. freq. [No. 2-4-4-1] when preset
2-4-4-3 Rate Factor rate is reached. (If double pulse output is your option at pulse output 2 assignment [No. 2-4-4-1], this setting See 9.3 180.0
becomes invalid, however.)
Changes pulse output 2 low cutoff (%).
2-4-4-4 Lowcut When proportion of flowrate falls below low cutoff where full scale flowrate [No. 2-4-3-3] is set at 100%, the See 9.3 0.0
pulse output is clamped at 0 (zero).
77
L--740--28--E

："SEL1" operation
："ENT" operation
1.Password & Disp 1.Flow Param 1.Ana. Output1 1.Function
2.Setup 2.DensParam 2.Ana. Output2 2.Select 1.Sensor Fail

※1
3.Temp Param 3.Pls. Output1 2.Txr Fail
3.Cal Fail
4.Outputs 4.Pls. Output2
4.Satura. Alm.
5.Status Output
5.Param Alm.
6.Txr Alm.
7.Slug Alm.
8.Cal in prog.
9.Fix Output
Exit
3.Drive Output Po.
4.Mode
Exit
6.Error Output 1.Analog
2.Pulse
Exit Exit
5.Status Input 1.Function
2.Mode
Exit
6.H/L Alarm 1.Assign
2.H/L Alm. Type
3.High Alm. Po.
3.Diag/Service 4.Low Alm. Po.
5.H/L Alm. hys

4.Maintenance
Exit Exit
Exit
Process screen NOTE: ※1：For this function, the setting change is disabled in Write Protect mode (refer to section 9.2).
78
L--740--28--E

Error
2-4-5-1 Function Changes status output assignment. (For detail, see 9.14 Status Output Function.) See 9.4
Status
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Sensor Fail state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-1 Sensor Fail No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Sensor Fail, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Txr Fail state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-2 Txr Fail No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Txr Fail, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Calibration Fail state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-3 Cal Fail No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Calibration Fail, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Saturated alarm state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-4 Satura. Alm. No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Saturation alarm, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Parameter alarm state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-5 Param Alm. No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Parameter alarm, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Txr alarm state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-6 Txr Alm. No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Txr alarm, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Slug alarm state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-7 Slug Alm. No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 On
however. For detail of Slug alarm, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Cal in Progress state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-8 Cal in prog. No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Cal in Progress, see 10.1 Error Messages.
1: Off ⇒ No assignment to status output, 2: On ⇒ Fix output state is assigned to status output.
2-4-5-2-9 Fix Output No output appears unless Status Out is selected at status output function assignment [No. 2-4-5-1], See 9.4 Off
however. For detail of Fix output, see 10.1 Error Messages.
2-4-5-3 Drive Output Po. The threshold value of a drive output can be set up. See 9.4 100
1: Off Active⇒With Status output condition "ON", status output is turned off.
2-4-5-4 Mode See 9.4 Off Active
2: On Active⇒With Status output condition "ON", status output is turned on.

Selects analog output pattern when an alarm condition occurs (sensor failure, Txr failure, or parameter alarm).
2-4-6-1 Analog 1: Downscale ⇒ Produces 2.4mA, 2: Zero ⇒ Produces 4mA, 3: Hold ⇒ Produces analog value as it is in See 9.4 Downscale
an error, 4: Upscale ⇒ Produces 21.6mA.
Selects pulse output pattern in an error (sensor failure, Txr failure, or parameter alarm).
2-4-6-2 Pulse 1: Zero ⇒ Stops pulse output, 2: Hold ⇒ Produces pulse output value as it is in an error, See 9.4 Zero
3: Upscale ⇒ Produces an 11kHz output.
2-5-1 Function Changes status input assignment. (See 9.15 Status input functions.) See 9.4 No function
Selects status input operating conditions.

2-5-2 Mode 1: Short Active ⇒ Means that status input is shorted and action begins. See 9.4 Short Active
2: Open Active ⇒ Means that status input is open and action begins.

Changes H/L alarm assignment. (See 9.16 High low alarm functions.)
2-6-1 Assign See 9.4 Mass Flow
To validate this setting, it is necessary that H/L alarm be selected at status output assignment.
Selects type of H/L alarm.

2-6-2 H/L Alm. Type 1: High alarm ⇒ High alarm is active, 2: Low alarm ⇒ Low alarm is active, See 9.4 High Alarm
3: H/L alarm ⇒ Both high and low alarms are active.
Changes high alarm setting. A value exceeding this setting activates high alarm; when it falls below this
2-6-3 High Alm. Po. setting by H/L alarm hysteresis [No. 2-6-5], high alarm condition is reset. A setting smaller than low alarm See 9.3 0.0
[No. 2-6-4] is not acceptable.
Changes low alarm setting. A value falling below this setting activates low alarm; when it exceeds this
2-6-4 Low Alm. Po. setting by H/L alarm hysteresis ]No. 2-6-5], low alarm condition is reset. A setting smaller than high alarm See 9.3 0.0
[No. 2-6-3] is not acceptable.
Changes high/low alarm hysteresis setting. Frequent annoying false alarms (repetitive alarm on/off in short
2-6-5 H/L Alm. hys duration) can be alleviated by choosing a larger value. To get an accurate picture of alarm condition, choose See 9.3 0
a smaller value.
79
L--740--28--E

："SEL1" operation
："ENT" operation
1.Password & Disp 1.Test/Status 1.Self-Diag 1.Hardware
2.Setup 2.Drive coil Check
3.Diag/Service 3.Txr Condition
4.LCD Test 1.Back Light
2.LED
3.LCD
Exit Exit
2.Installation 1.Static
2.Dynamic
Exit
Exit
2.Loop Test 1.Fix Analog1
2.Fix Analog2
3.Fix Pulse1
4.Fix Pulse2
5.Status Output
6.Status Input
Exit
3.Calibration 1.Auto Zero

※1
Exit
4.Trim Analog
4.Maintenance 5.Cnt/Ttl Reset
Exit Exit
Process screen
NOTE: ※1：This function is disabled in Write Protect mode (refer to section 9.2).
80
L--740--28--E

Runs a check for possible problems in the probe.
3-1-1-1 Hardware For details, see 9.6.1 Probe check. See 9.6.1 —
CAUTION: Be very careful as this check can stop outputs under certain circumstances.
Runs a check for an "open" in the drive coil.
3-1-1-2 Drive coil Check For details, see 9.6.2 Drive coil check. See 9.6.2 —
CAUTION: Be very careful as this check can stop outputs under certain circumstances.
Runs a check for possible problems in the transmitter.

3-1-1-3 Txr Condition See 9.6.3 —
For details, see 9.6.3 Transmitter check.
Tests backlight for possible problems by forcibly turning it on and off. While test continues, the LCD remains dead.
3-1-1-4-1 Back Light Performance test consist of WHT backlight lit (3 sec), ORG backlight lit (3 sec) and backlight unlit (3 sec) conducted See 9.4 —
twice one after the other (total of 18 sec) and ends automatically. After the test, the LCD restores normal illumination.
Tests LEDs for possible problems by forcibly turning them on and off. While test continues, the LCDs remain
3-1-1-4-2 LED dead. Performance test consist of RED LED lit (1.5 sec) and GRN LED lit (1.5 sec) conducted 6 times —
alternately (total of 18 sec) and ends automatically. After the test, the LCDs restore normal illumination.
Tests LCD for possible problems by illuminating and extinguishing all LCD dots. While test continues, the LCDs are
3-1-1-4-3 LCD forcibly switched in and out. Performance test consist of all dots lit (3 sec) and all dots unlit (3 sec) conducted twice —
alternately and ends automatically (a total of 12 sec). After the test, the LCDs restore normal illumination.

Runs a check for stability of sensor signal at zero flow.
3-1-2-1 Static See 9.6.4 —
For details, see 9.6.4 Pipeline oscillation check (zero flow).
Runs a check for stability of sensor signal while allowing the fluid.
3-1-2-2 Dynamic See 9.6.5 —
For details, see 9.6.5 Pipeline oscillation check (fluid flowing).

Produces a simulated output of analog output 1. It is beneficial for testing cable fault and performance of
3-2-1 Fix Analog1 associated equipment. See 9.7.1 —
For details, see 9.7.1 Analog output.
Produces a simulated output of analog output 2. It is beneficial for testing cable fault and performance of
3-2-2 Fix Analog2 associated equipment. See 9.7.1 —
For details, see 9.7.1 Analog output.
Produces a simulated output of pulse output 1. It is beneficial for testing cable fault and performance of
3-2-3 Fix Pulse1 associated equipment. See 9.7.2 —
For details, see 9.7.2 Pulse output.
Produces a simulated output of pulse output 2. It is beneficial for testing cable fault and performance of
3-2-4 Fix Pulse2 associated equipment. See 9.7.2 —
For details, see 9.7.2 Pulse output.
Produces a simulated output of status output. It is beneficial for testing cable fault and performance of
3-2-5 Status Output associated equipment. See 9.7.3 —
For details, see 9.7.3 Status output.
Monitors status input. It is beneficial for testing cable fault and performance of associated equipment.
3-2-6 Status Input See 9.7.4 —
For details, see 9.7.4 Status monitor input.

Performs zeroing. When you perform zeroing, verify that the flow is at zero.
3-3-1 Auto Zero See 9.8 —
For details, see 9.8 Zeroing Function.
81
L--740--28--E

："SEL1" operation
："ENT" operation
1.Password & Disp 1.Test/Status 1.Trim Analog1 1.4mA
2.Setup 2.Loop Test 2.20mA
3.Diag/Service 3.Calibration Exit
4.Trim Analog
※1
2.Trim Analog2 1.4mA
2.20mA
Exit Exit
5.Cnt/Ttl Reset 1.Count/Total1

※1
2.Count/Total2
Exit Exit
4.Maintenance 1.Input Signals
2.View History
3.Telop Info.
4.Soft Version
Exit Exit
Process screen
NOTE: ※1：This function is disabled in Write Protect mode (refer to section 9.2).
82
L--740--28--E

Trims 4mA analog output 1. It is factory adjusted and normally further adjustment is not required.
3-4-1-1 4mA However, if it is absolutely necessary, follow the procedure outlined. See 9.9 —
For details, see 9.9 Analog Output Trim.


Resets counter 1 and totalizer 1 reading to 0.
3-5-1 Count/Total1 See 9.10 —
For details, see 9.10 Reset Function.
Resets counter 2 and totalizer 2 reading to 0.

3-5-2 Count/Total2 See 9.10 —
For details, see 9.10 Reset Function.
4-1 Input Signals The screen is used for maintenance. View only —
Shows the number of running hours of transmitter.

4-2 View History Can be switched to calendar view. (Incorporated clock is maintenance oriented; No updating takes place if —
power to the transmitter is interrupted.)
When the number of running hours exceeds 100,000, a black circle "●" begins to blink at lower left of LCD
which can be canceled.
4-3 Telop Info. See 9.4 ON
1: Off ⇒ "●" stays off irrespective of elapsed hours. 2: ON ⇒ warning "●" begins to blink after 100,000
hours.
4-4 Soft Version Shows the software version and checksum value. View only —
83
L--740--28--E
9.3 Parameter Value Entry

The procedure to enter a numerical data of parameters is described here. As an example, reconfiguring
the temperature damping factor from "4.0" to "4.2" is covered in this section. A similar procedure applies
to setting up other parameters.
(1) Bring up the parameter item subject to setup.
Operate the view until the desired item subject to setup appears.
(For the procedure to view individual items, see 9.2.2 thru 9.2.7 Transition chart.)
When the cursor is moved and located at the desired item, click "SEL1" to bring up the
temperature damping factor setup screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Decide whether to modify this parameter or not.
Current setting is shown. If you want to modify it, click "SEL 3" to proceed to the next
screen.
If the current setting is OK, click "ENT" and then "SEL3" to return to the menu select
screen.
Click "SEL3". 　 Click "ENT"

Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) Numerical data adjustment

To move the cursor to the right, click "ENT".
(As scroll continues, a click next to the rightmost digit brings up a numerical data field
where all digits are highlighted [decision window]; clicking "ENT" further brings the cursor
to the leftmost digit.)
To increment the number, click "SEL1". To continually increment the number, hold "SEL1".
(The number changes in the order "0" ⇒ "1" ⇒ "2" ⇒ "3" ⇒ "4" ⇒ "5" ⇒ "6" ⇒ "7" ⇒" 8"
⇒ "9" ⇒ "." ⇒ "-" ⇒ " ".)
Click "ENT" twice.
① Move the cursor to the digit of interest.
With a change from "4.0" to "4.2" in mind, move the cursor to the 1st decimal place subject
to data adjustment.
Click "ENT" twice. (The next screen appears.)
② Adjust the numerical value.

With a change from "4.0" to "4.2" in mind, adjust the number in the 1st decimal place from
"0" to "2".
Click "SEL1" twice. (The next screen appears.)
Click "SEL1" twice.
③ Bring up the state ready to finalize numerical value entry.
Click "ENT", readying for finalizing the entry.
(The next screen appears.)
Click "ENT" once.

④ Finalize the entry.
Confirm that the desired numerical value is indicated.
Click "SEL1" readying for final confirmation of entry.
Click "SEL1".
(4) Activate the data entry.
① If the setting "4.2" is definitely OK, click "SEL3".
Setting is now complete. The previous data 4.0 is replaced by 4.2 and the window
returns to the initial menu select screen.
If you want to abort the setting process, click "ENT". (The next screen appears.)
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT". 　　　 Click "ENT".

② If you want to abort the setting process, click "SEL3".
A numerical value "4.0" remains unchanged and the window returns to the initial menu
select screen.
Click "SEL3".
84
L--740--28--E
9.4 Parameter Selection

The procedure to select a menu item of parameters is described here. As an example, selecting "Kelvin"
in temperature unit setting is covered in this section. A similar procedure applies to setting up other
parameters.
(1) Bring up the parameter item to be configured.
Operate the view until the desired menu item to be set up appears.
Move the cursor to the desired item, operate "SEL 1" to bring up temperature unit setup
screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Decide whether to change this parameter or not.
If you want to modify the current parameter shown, operate "SEL 3" to proceed to
the next screen.
If the current setting is acceptable, click "ENT" and "SEL 3" to return to the menu
select screen.
Click "SEL3". Click "ENT".
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) A change in option select screen

① Click "ENT" twice to select the desired item (Kelvin).
(To continue scrolling, hold down "ENT" key.)
Click "ENT".
Click "ENT".
② Confirm that the desired item (Kelvin) is selected.
To activate this setting (Kelvin), click "SEL 1".
To abort setting, click "ENT" twice and select Exit.
(4) Finalizing the menu item.

① If the setting (Kelvin) is O.K., operate "SEL 3".
Setting is complete and it returns to the initial
Click "ENT". menu select screen.
To abort setting, click "ENT" twice. (The screen
below appears.)
Click "SEL3".
② To abort setting, click "SEL 3".

The unit remains unchanged and it returns to
the initial menu select screen.
To abort setting, click "ENT". (Next screen
appears.)
Operate "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
③ If it is desired to exit the unit select screen. click "ENT".

The window returns to the initial menu select screen.
Click "ENT".
85
L--740--28--E
9.5 Password Function NOTE: For this function, the setting change is disabled in Write
Protect mode (refer to section 9.2).
To safeguard transmitter signals and readings against unauthorized parameter modification, you can
configure the transmitter to request entering a password before bringing up the configuration screen.
9.5.1 Password function setup

To enable the password function, it is necessary that the following items be set up.
(1) Password function setting (Password Set) (See 9.2.2 Transition chart and description (1) [No. 1-1].)
To activate password function, select "ON" ; to deactivate it, select "OFF".
(2) Creating a password (Password) (See 9.2.2 Transition chart and Description (1) [No. 1-2].)
Enter a 4-digit login password of numerals.
Once these setting are activated, entering a password is asked before any request for password
modification. Use extra care in the setup process because if the user forgets his password, there
will be no way to get to the reconfiguration screen.
(1) Bring up "MODE SELECT" screen.

Repeat clicking "EXT" until "MODE SELECT" screen appears.
("MODE SELECT" screen is shown at left.)
(2) Proceed key operation to enter the setup screen.
Click "SEL3" and the password setup screen appears.
Click "SEL3". (3) Decide whether to enter a password or not.
To enter a password, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
To exist the password entry process, click "ENT" and then click "SEL3"
to return to the normal screen.

Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(4) Creating a password.

① Enter a numerical data.
Enter a password. (In the example at left, password is "1234".)
To increment the number, click "SEL1". To continually increment the
number, hold "SEL1". (Figure changes in the order "0" ⇒ "1" ⇒ "2" ⇒
"3" ⇒ "4" ⇒ "5" ⇒ "6" ⇒ "7" ⇒ "8" ⇒ "9".)
To move the cursor to the right, click "ENT". (As you scroll, a click next
Click "ENT". Click "ENT". to the rightmost digit brings up a numerical data field where all digits are
highlighted [decision window]; clicking "ENT" further brings the cursor to
the leftmost digit.)
② Bring up the state ready to finalize the numerical value entry.
(Next screen appears.)
A password value ("1234") is set up.
Click "ENT", readying for finalizing the entry.
Click "ENT". (The next screen appears.)
③ Finalize the entry.

Click "SEL1". The numerical data is finalized and a confirmation screen
appears.
Click "SEL1".
④ If "1234" in this password screen is definitely OK, press "SEL3".
If the password is valid, "MODE SELECT" menu screen appears.
If the password is invalid, a message "Input error" appears, bringing up
the password entry screen again.
To abort the setting process, press "ENT". (The next screen appears.)
⑤To terminate password entry, click
Click "SEL3". Click "ENT". "SEL3" and the window returns to
the run screen.
Click "ENT".
＊ Invalid password
＊ Valid password
(5) Password entry is complete.
A setup menu view screen
appears.
86
L--740--28--E
9.6 Self-diagnostic Capabilities

Comprehensive self diagnostic capabilities are incorporated in this transmitter. To derive the maximum
benefit from the instrument, make full use of these functions during maintenance and inspection for early
identification of trouble or for investigation of the causes of trouble in a fault condition.
9.6.1 Probe check

A diagnostic test can be conducted to see if the transmitter is free from any problem in the probe circuitry.
If an error is detected upon diagnosis, there is a possibility that it presents a risk to maintaining accurate
measurement. You are prompted to follow the instructions given at an NG sign.
(1) Bring up the item of function you want to use.

Firstly, scroll the menu downward until the probe check item (Hardware) appears. (For the
procedure to view individual items, see 9.2.2 thru 9.2.7 Transition chart.) When the cursor
is located at probe check (Hardware), press "SEL1" to bring up probe check start screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Decide whether to activate the function or not.

If running a probe check is desired, perform it at zero flow.
To start a probe check, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
If you want to end the operation without running a check, press "ENT"
and then click "SEL3". The window returns to the menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) Description of probe (hardware) check function.

Run a hardware check screen appears with test results to be indicated at right.
(During the check, GRN LED blinks on and off.)
When test is completed on all items, confirm the results at right. An "NG" indicates possible fault.
If such is the case, take corrective action below:
Corrective action in case of NG

DSP Voltage: A fault in internal power supply is suspected; contact the factory for repair.
Results are indicated upon Input Freq: A fault in the frequency counter. Run a drive coil check (see 9.6.2 Drive coil check).
completion of individual If drive coil proves to be OK, a fault in circuitry is suspected; contact the factory.
checks.
Input Phase D: A fault in the phase difference measuring circuit. Run a transmitter check (see 9.6.3
Transmitter check). If it proves to be OK, a fault in the circuitry is suspected; contact the
factory.
Input Amp: A fault in the receiver circuit is suspected. Run a transmitter check (see 9.6.3 Transmitter
check). If it proves to be OK, a fault in the circuitry is suspected; contact the factory.
Input Amp: A fault in the temperature sensor. Run a transmitter check (see 9.6.3 Transmitter check).
If it proves to be OK, a fault in the circuitry is suspected; contact the factory.
(4) End of hardware check function

To terminate hardware check, press "SEL3".
Operation is brought to an end and the window returns to the initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
87
L--740--28--E
9.6.2 Drive coil check

A diagnostic test can be conducted to see if the drive coil is free from any problem. If an error is detected
upon diagnosis, there is a possibility that it presents a risk to maintaining accurate measurement. You are
prompted to follow the instructions given.

Firstly, scroll the menu downward until drive coil check item appears.
(For the procedure to view individual items, see 9.2.2 thru 9.2.7 Transition
chart.)
When the cursor is located at Drive Coil check, click "SEL1" to bring up
Drive coil check start screen.
Click "SEL1".

If running a drive coil check is desired, perform it at zero flow.
To start a drive coil check, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
If you want to end the check process without running a check, click
"ENT"and then click "SEL3". The window returns to the menu select
screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) Description of probe (hardware) check function.

Run Drive coil check screen appears and count down begins.
(The check lasts in 30 sec. approx.)
★ Proved acceptable ★ Proved unacceptable
① Found to be OK
No problem is found in the drive coil.
To exit the drive coil check screen,
Click "SEL3".
Operation is brought to an end and the
window returns to the initial menu select
screen.
Click "SEL3".
② An error is detected in diagnostics

A problem is found in sensor connections.
Verify the sensor for correct connections.
If connections appear to be OK and yet erratic condition persists,
an open sensor is a possibility. Contact the factory.
To terminate the drive coil check process, click "SEL3".
Operation is brought to an end the window returns to the initial
menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
88
L--740--28--E
9.6.3 Transmitter check

A diagnostic test can be conducted to see if the transmitter is free from any problem. If an error is detected
upon diagnosis, there is a possibility that it presents a risk to maintaining accurate measurement. You are
prompted to follow the instructions given.
A precaution to remember: While the check is in progress, flowmetering is disabled with flowrate at 0
(zero).
Firstly, scroll the menu downward until transmitter check (Txr Condition) appears.
(2) Run the function

Place the cursor over transmitter check (Txr Condition) and click "SEL1".
Transmitter coil check begins and the next screen appears.
Click "SEL1".
(3) Description of transmitter check function
A check is conducted sequentially on individual items and results are
indicated at right.
① Diagnostic results are OK.

No problem is found in the trans-
mitter. A switch to menu select
screen takes place automatically.
★ All items found OK
★ Certain items found unusual.
② A problem is found in the diagnostic test.

A fault is in the transmitter.
Review the nature of item found to be NG and correct the conditions
according to the instructions below.
To exit the transmitter check process, click "ENT".
Corrective actions in case of NG

Failure Temp. Connect: A fault is found in temperature sensor connections. Verify
sensor connections. (See 7. Wiring Connections.)
Click "ENT". If erratic condition persists, contact the factory.
P.O.Connect: A fault is found in pickoff sensor connections. Verify sensor
connections. (See 7. Wiring Connections.)
If erratic condition persists, contact the factory.
EEPROM: Erratic data in EEPROM. A problem in operation is a
possibility; contact the factory. A problem in proper operation
is a possibility; contact the factory.
Date Update: Data error exists. A problem in proper operation is a
possibility; contact the factory.
Txr Temp: Internal temp. of transmitter is out of acceptable range;
continued operation in this condition will reduce life of parts.
Take necessary steps to lower temp.
If NG sign persists despite normal ambient temperature, a
defect in the transmitter is suspected; contact the factory.
③ A warning message upon detection of a fault.

Click "ENT".
④ A warning message upon detection of a fault.
The message tells the operator that correct measurement is no longer
warranted under the current conditions..
Operation is brought to an end and the window returns to the initial menu
select screen.
Click "ENT".
89
L--740--28--E
9.6.4 Pipeline vibration check (at zero flow)

This check diagnoses your flow measurement installation for condition － whether it is free from external
disturbances and noises resulting from pipeline vibration or other factors.
To be successful in obtaining accurate results, run the test at zero flow.
Upon completion of the check, diagnostic results will be indicated and you will be prompted to follow the
instructions given.
Firstly, proceed key operation to show Installation (pipeline vibration check) (zero
flow) screen.
When the cursor is placed over pipeline vibration check (Static), click "SEL1" to bring
up pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow) start screen.
Click "SEL1". (2) Decide whether to activate the function or not.

If you want to run pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow), conduct it at zero
flow. To start Static check (zero flow), click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
To exit the check process without running a check, click "ENT" and then click
"SEL3". The window returns to the menu select screen.
Click "ENT". Click "SEL3".
(3) Description of probe check function

Run pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow) start screen appears and count
down begins. (The check lasts in 30 seconds, approx.)
★ Best Condition
(4) Diagnostic results

① Best Condition is indicated.
Top rated condition, permitting accurate and satisfactory measurement. Use the
meter in this state.
To end pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow) process, click "SEL3". Operation
is brought to an end and the window returns to the initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
★ Good Condition
② Good Condition is indicated.

Sufficient for flow measurement. Use the meter in this state.
To end pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow) process, click "SEL3". Operation
is brought to an end and the window returns to the initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
★ Not so Good Condition

③ Not so Good Condition
Flow signal fluctuates. Verify influences of pump vibration or other disturbances.
To stabilize flow signal fluctuation, we suggest to select a larger damping factor for
the flow. To end pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow) process, click "SEL3".
Operation is brought to an end and the window returns to the initial menu select
screen.
Click "SEL3".
④ Bad Condition
Flow signal fluctuates excessively.
Inspect the pipeline for condition. (See 6.4 Piping Instructions.)
Verify influences of pump vibration or other disturbances.
To stabilize flow signal fluctuation, we suggest to select a larger damping factor for
the flow. To end pipeline vibration check (Static) (zero flow) process, click "SEL3".
Operation is brought to an end and the window returns to the initial menu select
screen.
Click "SEL3".
90
L--740--28--E
9.6.5 Pipeline oscillation check (at normal flow)

This check diagnoses your flow measurement installation for condition while allowing the fluid flow －
whether it is free from external disturbances and noises resulting from pipeline vibration or other factors.
Upon completion of the check, diagnostic results will be indicated and you will be prompted to follow the
instructions given.
During the process of diagnosis, analog output and pulse output operations are suspended.

Firstly, proceed key operation to show Installation (pipeline vibration check) screen.
When the cursor is placed over pipeline vibration check (Dynamic), click "SEL1" to
bring up pipeline vibration check (Dynamic) start screen.
Click "SEL1".

If you want to run pipeline vibration check (Dynamic), settle down the flow to a
steady state and then click "SEL3" to go to the next screen.
To exit the check process without running a check, click "ENT" and then click
"SEL3". The window returns to the menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) Description of probe check (Dynamic) function

Run pipeline vibration check (Dynamic) screen appears and countdown
begins.
(The check lasts in 30 seconds, approx.)
★ Stable flow
(4) Diagnostic results

① Stable flow
Stable flow signals. Satisfactory condition for measurement. Use the meter in
this state.
To end pipeline oscillation check, click "SEL3". Operation is brought to an end
and the window returns to initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
★ Not so stable flow
② Not so stable flow

Flow signal fluctuates.
To stabilize flow signal fluctuation, we suggest to select a larger damping factor
for the fluid flow.
To end pipeline oscillation check process, click "SEL3". Operation is brought to
an end and the window returns to the initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
★ Unstable flow
③ Unstable flow
Flow signal fluctuates excessively; Inaccurate measurement is a possibility.
We suggest to inspect the pipeline once for condition (zero flow). (See 9.6.4
Pipeline vibration check (zero flow).
To stabilize flow signal fluctuation, we suggest to select a larger damping factor
of flow.
To end pipeline oscillation check process, click "SEL3". Operation is brought to
an end and the window returns to the initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
91
L--740--28--E
9.7 Simulated Signal Input/Output Capabilities

This transmitter features simulated output and input monitor functions. They are beneficial for running a
loop check after installation and for diagnosing erratic flow signals.
9.7.1 Analog output

An analog output is available at any current magnitude.
(The procedure to provide a 12.00mA simulated output of analog output 1 is described here in the
example below.)
(For key-in procedure, see 9.1.1 Key operation.)
Firstly, proceed key operation to show a screen for simulated output of analog
output 1. (For the procedure to view individual items, see 9.2.2 thru 9.2.7
Transition chart.) When the cursor is placed over simulated output of analog
output 1 (Fix Analog 1), click "SEL1" to bring up the simulated output setup
screen for analog output 1.
Click "SEL1".
If you want to start simulated output of pulse output 1, click "SEL3" to proceed
to the next screen.
To abort the process without producing a simulated output, click "ENT" and
then click "SEL3". The window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) Enter a simulated output value.

Set up a simulated current output current value desired.
For setup procedure, see 9.3 Parameter Value Setup (3).
(In the following screen, a value 12.0000 is finalized.)
(4) Run a simulated output

① If a simulated output "12.0000" displayed is definitely OK, click "SEL3".
If you want to abort the simulated output process, click "ENT" and then click
"SEL3". The window returns to menu select screen
Click "ENT".
(5) Simulated output of analog output 1 is now generated.

Output of analog output 1 is fixed to 12.00mA.
(Unaffected by obtained measurements, error processing or other factors.)
(During the check, GFN LED blinks on and off.)
If you want to cancel the simulate output process, click "SEL3".
Simulated output stops and the window returns to initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
92
L--740--28--E
9.7.2 Pulse output

A pulse output is available at any frequency desired.
(Simulated output in pulse output 1 is described here in the example below.)
This section covers the procedure to provide a 2100Hz simulated pulse output. A similar procedure applies
to other output settings.

Firstly, proceed key operation to show a screen for simulated output of pulse
output 1 (Fix Pulse 1).
When the cursor is placed over simulated output of pulse output 1 (Fix Pulse 1),
click "SEL1" to bring up simulated output setup screen for pulse output 1.
Click "SEL1".
If you want to start simulated output of pulse output 1, click "SEL3" to proceed
to the next screen.
To abort the process without running a simulated output, click "ENT" and then
"SEL3". The window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".

Set up a simulated output frequency desired.
For the setup procedure, see 9.3 Parameter Value Setup (3).
(In the following screen, a value 2100.00 is finalized.)
(4) Run a simulated output.

If a simulated output "2100.0" is definitely OK, click "SEL3".
"SEL3".
The window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(5) Simulated output of pulse output 1 is now generated.

Output of pulse output 1 is fixed to 2100Hz.
Click "SEL3".
93
L--740--28--E
9.7.3 Status output

A status output is available at any level desired.
This section covers the procedure to provide a simulated status output in the setting ON. A similar
procedure applies to other output settings

Firstly, proceed key operation to show a screen for simulated output of status
output (Status Output).
(For the procedure to view individual items, see 9.2.2 thru 9.2.7 Transition
chart.)
When the cursor is placed over Status Output, click "SEL1" to bring up
simulated output setup screen for status output.
Click "SEL1".
If you want to start simulated output of status output, click "SEL3" to proceed
to the next screen.
To abort the procedure without running a simulated output, click "ENT" and
then "SEL3". The window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".

Select the simulated output mode.
For the setup procedure, see 9.4 Parameter Selection (3).
(4) Run a simulated output.

If setting "On" is definitely OK, click "SEL3".
"SEL3".
The window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(5) Status output is now generated.

Output of status output is fixed to On.
Click "SEL3".
Click "SEL3".
94
L--740--28--E
9.7.4 Status input

You can monitor the status of status input signal.
(1) Bring up the item of function you want to use "ENT".

Firstly, proceed key operation to show a screen for Status Input monitor.
When the cursor is placed over status input monitor (Status Input), click "SEL1"
to bring up status input monitor screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Status input monitor active now.

The screen changes in the status input monitor mode.
If you want to cancel the input monitor mode, click "SEL3".
Input monitor mode is canceled and the window returns to menu select screen.
★ Status signal is in the open. ★ Status signal is in the short.
★ Status signal is in the short.
★ Status signal is in the open.
Click "SEL3". Click "SEL3".
95
L--740--28--E
9.8 Zeroing Function

This feature detects errors in zeroing and reduces offset flowrate drift to minimum. At the stage of
installation and in cases where flow conditions significantly change, zeroing is an essential part of the
routines required for maintaining accurate and consistent measurement.
During the zeroing, fill the sensor unit completely with the fluid the temperature of which is within ±10℃
from the temperature at which it operates.
CAUTION: 1. Before using this function, close both the display lid and the terminal lid of
the transmitter and make sure that the transmitter is in the condition as the
actual operating condition.
2. Fluid (liquid or gas) must completely fill the sensor unit and be absolutely at
zero flow.
3. Accurate zeroing cannot be achieved unless fluid flow is completely halted.
4. Ensure that the shutoff valve has no leaks.
Zero adjustment comes in three options: with LCD switches, with status input, and through
communication. Each has identical functions. Choose one that best suits your task.
9.8.1 Through LCD display switches NOTE: This function is disabled in Write Protect
mode (refer to section 9.2).
Firstly, proceed key operation to show Calibration (Auto Zero) screen.
When the cursor is placed over zeroing (Auto Zero), click "SEL1" to bring up the next
confirmation screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Confirm zero flow
Shut off valves before after the meter and verify that fluid flow is halted.
Upon confirmation of steady state, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
If fluid flow is not completely halted, click "ENT" followed by clicking "SEL3".
Do not attempt zeroing. (Ensure zero flow once again before you perform zeroing.)
Click "SEL3". Click "ENT". Click "SEL3".

Click "ENT".
(3) Confirm precautionary notes during zeroing.

Performing zeroing overwrites previous zero setting.
Reconfirm. If no problem is found, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
If you want to reconfirm the state, click "ENT" followed by clicking "SEL3". Do not
attempt to run zeroing. (Upon reconfirmation of the state, perform zeroing.)
Click "SEL3". Click "ENT". Click "SEL3".

Click "ENT".
(4) Confirm before performing the zeroing

The current zero offset is shown.
If you want to perform zeroing, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next screen.
If you want to reconfirm the state, click "ENT" followed by clicking "SEL3". Do not run
zeroing. (Upon reconfirmation of the state, you may perform zeroing.)
Click "SEL3".
(5) Zeroing in progress

Zeroing is now in progress. (During the zero adjustment, GRN LED blinks on and off.)
As a warning, RED backlight lights for 1 sec at start and end of zeroing.
(Zeroing lasts for 30 sec. approx.)
(6) Auto zero results

Upon completion of auto zero, results are indicated; 3 sec later, the window returns to menu select screen.
If zeroing has failed, you cannot expect accurate measurement in this state.
Reconfirm the state and perform the zeroing once again.
In case of auto zero failure, an error message "Auto Zero Failure" appears.
(For details, see 10.1 Error Messages.)
★ Zeroing successful ★ Zeroing failed
★3 sec elapsed ★3 sec elapsed
96
L--740--28--E
9.8.2 Through status input signal

You can perform the zeroing with status input signal. Follow the procedure given below for preparation
and operation:
(1) Preparation to assign status input to zeroing
・Set status input function to "Auto Zero".
(For details of setup, see 9.15 Status Input and 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-5-1].
・Set input mode of status input.
(For details of setup, see 9.15 Status Input and 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-5-2].
(2) Preparation to assign zeroing in progress to status output
(You can perform the zeroing without this setting. You may omit this procedure if not required.)
By completing the settings that follow, you can monitor the zeroing status with status output.
・Set function assignment of status output to "Error Status".
・Set adjustment item of status output to "On".
・Set working output of status output. (For detail of setup procedure, see 9.14.3 Status output and
9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-1], [No. 2-4-5-2-8], and [No. 2-4-5-3].
(3) Procedure to run the zeroing
By working with separately input, you can perform the zeroing. Follow the procedure outline below:
① Preparation
Verify the following precautions:
During the zeroing, fill the sensor unit completely with the fluid the temperature of which is
within ±10℃ from the temperature at which it operates.
CAUTION: 1. Fluid (liquid or gas) must completely fill the sensor unit and be absolutely
at zero flow.
2. Accurate zeroing cannot be achieved unless fluid flow is completely halted.
3. Ensure that the shutoff valves, etc. have no leaks.
② Run the zeroing: set the status input to 0.3 sec or longer in the "Short" (when input mode is
"Short"). Upon detection of an input, the zeroing process starts and this process lasts in about
30 seconds.
In the event zeroing has failed, you cannot expect accurate measurement. Upon completion of
zeroing, do not forget to run a check for possible errors.
9.8.3 Through Link Top communication NOTE: This function is disabled in Write Protect
Zeroing can be conducted through communication, using the software Link Top. For detail of procedure,
see the Link Top instruction manual.
97
L--740--28--E
9.9 Analog Trim Function NOTE: This function is disabled in Write Protect mode
(refer to section 9.2).
The transmitter is provided with two analog outputs. Both are factory adjusted and requires no further
adjustment. However, if it is absolutely necessary to readjust, follow the instructions outlined below.
Prior to making adjustment, connect required measuring instruments in place for making output level
measurement of analog output. Covered below is the procedure to make 4mA trim of analog output 1
(trimming 4.1mA to 4mA in the example below). A similar procedure applies to other adjustments.

Firstly, proceed key operation to show Trim Analog 1 screen (4mA trim of analog output 1).
When the cursor is placed over 4mA trim of analog output 1, click "SEL1" to bring up
4mA trim screen of analog output 1.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Decide whether to perform analog trim or not.
To perform 4mA trim of analog output 1, click "SEL3" to proceed to the next
screen.
If you want to cancel the trim process, click "ENT" followed by clicking "SEL3" and
the window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) Enter the present output value. (The transmitter produces 4mA output now.)
At present, the output of analog output 1 is fixed to 4mA.
Enter the current reading (4.1mA) of the instrument connected.
For the setup procedure, see 9.3 Parameter Value Setup (3).
(In the screen below, a value 4.1000 is finalized.)
(4) Conform the measurement value.

If the measurement value "4.1000" is definitely OK, click "SEL3".
4mA trim of analog output 1 is performed accordingly.
If you want to cancel the trim process, click "ENT" followed by clicking "SEL3" and
the window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(5) Confirm the current reading of analog output1.

Analog output 1 produces the 4mA output that has just been trimmed.
Confirm the current value of the instrument connected.
If the instrument reads 4mA and requires no further trimming, click "SEL3".
But in the case the instrument reads a value different from 4mA, click "ENT"
followed by clicking "SEL3". You are now back to step (3) and ready to try again.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
Click "ENT".
Click "SEL3".
98
L--740--28--E
9.10 Reset Function NOTE: This function is disabled in Write Protect mode
(refer to section 9.2).
The transmitter is provided with two pulse outputs along with two counters (1 and 2) and two totalizers
(1 and 2) which work in sync with pulse output. If it is desired to reset one particular counter and its
associated totalizer, follow the procedure outlined below. (Since the totalizer counts pulses coming in from
the counter, you cannot reset them independently.)
The procedure to reset the counter / totalizer 1 to 0 is described here as an example. The same
procedure applies to the other pair.

Firstly, proceed key operation to show counter/totalizer 1 reset (Cnt/Ttl Reset )
screen.
When the cursor is placed over counter/totalizer 1 reset (Count/Total 1), click "SEL1"
to bring up the Count/Total 1 reset screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Decide whether to reset to 0 or not.

The present counter reading is indicated.
If you want to reset to 0, click "SEL3". The next screen appears and the counter
reads 0.
If you want to cancel the reset process, click "ENT" and then click "SEL3".
The window then returns to menu select screen.

Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) The present counter reading after the reset operation is indicated.
If you want to abort the reset process, click "ENT" followed by clicking "SEL3"
and the window returns to menu select screen.
If you want to reset to 0 once again, click "SEL3".

Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
99
L--740--28--E
9.11 View Variables Screen Setup NOTE: For this function, the setting change is disabled
in Write Protect mode (refer to section 9.2).
Display / Hide and priority of variables view can be set up at the view variables screen.
Follow the procedure outlined below:

Firstly, proceed key operation to show the variables view priority setup (Var. Priority)
screen.
When the cursor is placed over variables view priority setup (Var. Priority), click "SEL1"
to bring up Var. Priority setup screen.
Click "SEL1".
(2) Decide whether to change priority of variables or not.

The current priority of variables is shown.
If you want to change the priority, click "SEL3" and the next screen, Var. Priority,
appears.
If you want to cancel the priority change process, click "ENT" followed by clicking
"SEL3" and the window returns to menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
Click "ENT".
(3) View priority setup

The current view variables priority is shown.
Individual items are numbered on the right side according to their view priority. If
0 is set, the affected item disappears from the list. By entering numbers desired
and then scrolling through the list downward, the order of items are rearranged.
(For the setup procedure, see 9.3 Parameter Value Setup (3).)
Available items subject to priority rearrangement are
1. Mass Flow: Instant mass flowrate
2. Vol Flow: Instant volume rate or instant volume rate (fixed density)
3. Density: Density
4. Temp: Temperature
5. Counter1: Counter reading of pulse output 1
6. Counter2: Counter reading of pulse output 2
7. Totalizer1: Total flow of pulse output 1
8. Totalizer2: Total flow of pulse output 2
9. Ana Out1: % reading of analog output 1
10. Ana Out2: % reading of analog output 2
Upon completion of setup, move the cursor to "Enter" and click "S1"
A Var. Priority confirmation screen appears.
(4) Finalizing priority

① If the priority is OK, click "SEL3".
Click "SEL1".
Setup is complete and the window returns
to the initial menu select screen.
If you want to abort the setup, click "ENT"
and the screen below appears.
Click "SEL3".

② If you want to abort setup, click "SEL3".
Setup is complete and the window returns
to the initial menu select screen.
Click "SEL3".
100
L--740--28--E
9.12 Pulse Output Function NOTE: For this function, the setting change is disabled in
Write Protect mode (refer to section 9.2).
The transmitter is provided with two pulse outputs which can be set up as independent outputs. Attractive
features include a double pulse output created by allowing two pulses out of phase by 90 or 180 degrees,
and a bidirectional pulse output - linked with status output signal, enabling the operator to discriminate the
direction of flow. Refer to the following topics for description of these features.
(NOTE: When the pulse output assignment, full scale flowrate, or frequency at full scale is modified, the
Counter/Totalizer will be reset.)
9.12.1 Pulse output 1

If you want to use pulse output 1, it is required that the following be set up.
For using bidirectional pulse output or double pulse output, be sure to set the assignment of interest.
(1) Setup procedure
① Pulse output 1 assignment (Assign) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-3-1].)
Kind of flow is selected.
・Mass Flow: Mass flow
・Volume Flow: Volumetric flow
② Frequency of pulse output 1 at full scale flowrate (Freq Factor) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3)
[No. 2-4-3-2].)
The frequency at the flowrate set in ③ is set up. Set it to match the measurable range of the
instrument that measures pulse output. Acceptable setting range is from 0.1 to 10000Hz.
③ Full scale flowrate of pulse output 1 (Rate Factor) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-3-3].)
An output is generated at the frequency set in ② when the preset flowrate is reached.
④ Low flow cutoff of pulse output 1 (Lowcut) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-3-4].)
When the proportion of flowrate is smaller than the low flow cutoff value - where the flowrate set
in ③ is set to 100% - the output is clamped at 0. Acceptable setting range is from 0.0 to 10.0%.
⑤ The state of pulse output in an error (Pulse) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-6-2].)
Pulse output value in an error can be selected from the following three options:
・Zero: Pulse output is halted.
・Hold: Pulse output immediately before an error is maintained.
・Upscale: 11kHz is output. (For detail of output in an error, see 10.1 Error Messages.)
9.12.2 Pulse output 2

If you want to use pulse output 2, it is required that the following be set up.
For using bidirectional pulse output or double pulse output, be sure to set the assignment of interest.
(In the case of double pulse output, set only pulse output 2 assignment. Invalidating parameters other
than that, pulse output 2 is also output with the same setting as that of pulse output 1.)
① Pulse output 2 assignment (Assign) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart(3) [No. 2-4-4-1].) Type of flow to
be assigned is selected.
・Mass Flow: Mass flow
・Volume Flow: Volumetric flow
・Double pulse 90: Double pulse output 90°
・Double pulse －90: Double pulse output － 90°
As for double pulse output, see 9.12.4 Double pulse output.
As for ②, ③, and ④ below, a procedure similar to pulse output 1 applies. See 9.12.1 Pulse output (1).
② Frequency of pulse output 2 at full scale flowrate (Freq Factor) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3)
[No. 2-4-4-2].)
③ Full scale flowrate of pulse output 2 (Rate Factor) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-4-3].)
④ Low flow cutoff of pulse output 2 (Lowcut) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-4-4].)
⑤ The state of pulse output in an error (Pulse) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-6-2].)
101
L--740--28--E
9.12.3 Bidirectional pulse output

By allowing status output signal to provide flow direction information, the transmitter distinguishes
between pulse outputs in the forward and reverse flow, and counts up pulses independently. (Hence, it
requires on the part of measuring instrument a circuit to distinguish the directions of flow.) To utilize this
function, you need to set up the following in addition to settings of pulse outputs 1 and 2.
(1) Setup procedure
① Status output function assignment (Function) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-1].)
・Select Bi Direction.
② Active output of status output (Mode) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-3].)
Set the active output status of status output.
・Off Active: Output is in the Short in the forward fluid flow.
・On Active: Output is in the Open in the forward fluid flow.
(2) An example of settings and assignments

Status output function assignment (Function): Bi Direction
Active output of status output (Mode): Off Active
Pulse output 1 assignment (Assign): Mass Flow
Frequency of pulse output 1 at full scale flowrate (Freq Factor): 1000 [Hz]
Full scale flowrate of pulse output 1 (Rate Factor): 100.0 [kg/min]
Low flow cutoff of pulse output 1 (Lowcut): 10.0 [%]
100
Mass flowrate [kg/min]
80
60
40
20
0
Time
-20
-40
-60
-80
-100
Output freq. [Hz]
1000
800
600
400 Low flow cutoff freq.
100[Hz]
200
=1000｢Hz] 10[%]/100"
0
Output clamped at 0 Output appears Output clamped at Output appears due to

due to proportion of dueto proportion 0 due to proportion proportion of flowrate >
flowrate < low cutoff. of flowrate > low of flowrate < low low cutoff.
cutoff. cutoff.
Status output
Open
Short
Status output is Open Status output is Short
as flowrate goes as flowrate goes
negative below 0. positive below 0.
102
L--740--28--E
9.12.4 Double pulse output

This function provides pulse output 2 in sync with pulse output 1.
It is enabled by setting up one of the following to pulse output 2 assignment.
(1) Setup procedure
① Pulse output 2 assignment (Assign)
Pulse output 2 lags pulse output 1 by 90 degrees (1/4 of the period) when it goes into action.
(The maximum lag is 1 msec, above which is a lag within 1/4 of the period, however.)
・Double pulse －90: Double pulse output －90°
Pulse output 1 lags pulse output 2 by 90 degrees (1/4 of the period) when it goes into action.
(The maximum lag is 1 msec, above which is a lag within 1/4 of the period, however.)
Pulse output 2 goes into action, polarity of pulse output 1 waveform inverted.
(2) Examples of setting and behavior
① Double pulse 90°
・Fast pulse output (above 250Hz)
Pulse out 1
Pulse out 2
90
(1/4 of the period)
・Slow pulse output (below 250Hz)
Pulse out 1
Pulse out 2
1msec
② Double pulse －90°

・Fast pulse output (above 250Hz)
Pulse out 1
Pulse out 2
90
(1/4 of the period)
・Slow pulse output (below 250Hz)

Pulse out 1
Pulse out 2
1msec
③ Double pulse 180°

Pulse out 1
Pulse out 2
103
L--740--28--E
9.13 Analog Output Function NOTE: For this function, the setting change is disabled in
Write Protect mode (refer to section 9.2).
The transmitter is provided with two analog outputs which can be assigned to "mass flow", "volume flow",
"temperature", "density" and "drive output". The setup procedure is outlined below:
(1) Setup procedure

By reconfiguring the following five parameters, outputs that suit your particular application are made
available.
① Output assignment (Assign) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-1-1] and [No. 2-4-2-1].)
Types of measurement are selected.
・Mass Flow: Instant mass flowrate
・Vol Flow: Instant volume flowrate
・Density: Density
・Temp: Temperature
・Drive Output: Drive output
When assignments are modified, reconfigure upper limit, lower limit, low flow cutoff, and damping
factor to values that best suit your application.
② Upper limit value (URV) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-1-2] and [No. 2-4-2-2].)
The lower limit of analog output can be changed; a 4mA output is produced when the preset
value is reached. Values outside the maximum range (※1) and smaller than the lower limit value
are unacceptable, however.
③ Lower limit value (LRV) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-1-3] and [No. 2-4-2-3].)
The upper limit of analog output can be changed; a 20mA output is produced when the preset
value is reached. Values outside the maximum range (※1) and larger than the upper limit value
are unacceptable, however.
④ Low flow cutoff (Lowcut) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-1-4] and [No. 2-4-2-4].)
The low flow cutoff of analog output (%) can be changed. When the low flow cutoff value is
larger than the proportion of analog output － where the upper limit is set to 100% and the lower
limit is 0% － the analog output becomes 4mA. Acceptable setting range is from 0% to 10%.
⑤ Damping factor (Added Damp) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (3) [No. 2-4-1-5] and [No. 2-4-2-5].)
Damping constant of analog output (sec) can be changed. Select a larger value when analog
output fluctuates excessively; select a smaller value when fast response is desired.
Acceptable setting range is from 0 to 200 (sec).
⑥ The state of analog output in an error (Analog) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (5) [No. 2-4-6-1].)
・Downscale: 2.4mA is output.
・Zero: 　　 4mA is output.
・Hold: 　　 Analog output immediately before an error is maintained.
・Upscale: 21.6mA is output.
(For details of outputs in an error, see 10.1 Error Messages.)
※1 Maximum range
Instant mass flowrate: － Max. allowable range to max. allowable range
Instant volume flowrate: － Max. allowable range/0.3 to max. allowable range/0.3
Temperature: Max. temperature range of sensor
Density: 0.0 to 5.0
CAUTION: When measurement-related unit set up at Assign is modified, the

upper and lower limit values will be converted automatically to the
measures to read in the unit selected.
104
L--740--28--E
9.14 Status Output NOTE: For this function, the setting change is disabled in Write Protect
One output chosen from status information, flow direction, and alarm state can be assigned to the status
output.
For details of individual functions, refer to the respective items below:
9.14.1 Status output (Error Status)

By assigning the output of status information to the status output, the state of the flowmeter of interest can
be output. Listed below are user assignable flowmeter-related items that can be set up and configured
individually.
・Sensor error (Sensor Failure)
・Transmitter warning (Txr Failure)
・Calibration error (Calibration Failure)
・Output error (Saturated Alarm)
・Parameter alarm (Parameter Alarm)
・Transmitter alarm (Transmitter Alarm)
・Slug flow alarm (Slug Alarm)
・Calibration in progress (Cal in Progress)
・Simulated output being produced (Fix Output)
(For details, see 10.1 Error Messages and 10.2 Status Messages.)
(1) Operating procedure
・Select "Error Status" in selecting the status output function assignment. (See 9.2.5 Transition
chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-1].)
・The flowmeter-related states listed above are available for an output; set up each item to either on
or off. (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-2-1] thru [No. 2-4-5-2-9].)
・Set up the active output of status output. According to the settings, the following outputs become
available.
With setting "On Active", the output is Short when the preset state is reached.
With setting "Off Active", the output is Open when the preset state is reached.
(See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-4].)
When the settings above take effect, the functions are ready for use.
9.14.2 Bidirectional flow direction output (Bi Direction)

By selecting the bidirectional output for status output, an output representing the flow direction becomes
available.
Pulse output is normally available in the forward direction, but with the bidirectional output setup, pulse
output in the reverse direction is also available. (For details, see 9.12.3 Bidirectional pulse output.)
・Select "Bi Direction" in selecting the status output function assignment. (See 9.2.5 Transition chart
(4) [No. 2-4-5-1].)
・Set the active output of status output. According to the settings, the following outputs become
available.
With setting "On Active", the output is Short when the fluid flows in the reverse direction.
With setting "Off Active", the output is Open when the fluid flows in the reverse direction.
105
L--740--28--E
9.14.3 H/L alarm output (H/L Alarm)

By assigning the high/low alarm output to the status output, an error output of high/low alarm of interest
can be provided. Listed below are available variables that can be set up.
・Dens: Density
・Counter 1: Counter 1
(For details of high/low alarms, see 9.16 High/Low Alarm Functions.)
・Select "H/L Alarm" in selecting the status output function assignment; the state of high/low alarm
can then be output. (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-1].)
・Set the output of status output. According to the settings, the following outputs become available.
With setting "On Active", the output is in the Short in an alarmed condition of high/low alarms.
With setting "Off Active", the output is in the Open in an alarmed condition of high/low alarms.
9.14.4 Drive output alarm (Used for maintenance purpose)

By assigning the drive output alarm to status output, the alarm can be activated when the drive output
exceeds the threshold.
・Select "Drive O Alm." for the status output function assignment; the state of drive output can then
be output.
(See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-1])
・Enter the threshold to determine at what percentage of the drive output the alarm output should
be activated. The initial value is 100%.
・Set the output of status output. When this setting takes effect, the following status output appears.
With setting "On Active", the output is always in the Short.
With setting "Off Active", the output is always in the Open.
The function becomes available by setting the above.
9.14.5 No assignment (No Function)

When this setting takes effect, the following status output appears.
With setting "On Active", the output is always in the Short.
With setting "Off Active", the output is always in the Open.
・Select "No Function" in selecting the status output function assignment. (See 9.2.5 Transition
chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-1].)
106
L--740--28--E
9.15 Status Input Function NOTE: For this function, the setting change is disabled in Write
Protect mode (refer to section 9.2).
One of "pulse/analog output fixed to 0%", "zeroing", "totalizer 1 and totalizer 2 reset", "totalizer 1 reset", or
"totalizer 2 reset" can be assigned to the status input.
For details of individual functions, refer to the respective items below.
9.15.1 Pulse/analog output fixed to 0% (0% Sig Lock)

When an input arrives across status input terminals, pulse output and analog output are fixed to 0Hz and
0mA, respectively.
Stopping an input across status input terminals cancels fixing of the output.
・Select "0% Sig Lock" in selecting the status input function assignment.
(See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2 to 5-1].)
・Set the input mode of status input. According to the settings, the following input mode will be
enabled:
"Short Active" setting: the function is activated 0.3 seconds after the condition of the circuit
between status input terminals is changed from opened to shorted.
"Open Active" setting: the function is activated 0.3 seconds after the condition of the circuit
between status input terminals is changed from shorted to opened.
(See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No.2-5-2])
9.15.2 Zero adjustment (Auto Zero)

When an input arrives across status input terminals, automatic zero is initiated to reduce offset flowrate
drift to minimum.
(For detail of the function, see "9.8 Zeroing Function".)
・Select "Auto Zero" in selecting the status input function assignment.
(See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-5-1].)
enabled:
(See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No.2 to 5-2])
9.15.3 Totalizer 1 and totalizer 2 reset (Reset Total 1 and 2)

The transmitter is provided with counters (Counters 1 and 2) and totalizers (Totalizers 1 and 2) which
work in synchronism with pulse output. When an input arrives across status input terminals, all these
counters － Counters 1 and 2 and Totalizers 1 and 2 － are reset to 0.
In this connection, counter 1 and totalizer 1 respond to pulse 1 output while counter 2 and totalizer 2
respond to pulse 2. (For detail of the function, see 9.10 Reset Function.)
・Select "Reset C/T 1･2" in selecting the status input function assignment.
enabled:
107
L--740--28--E
9.15.4 Totalizer 1 reset (Reset Total 1)

work in synchronism with pulse output. When an input arrives across status input terminals, counter 1
and totalizer 1 are reset to 0.
respond to pulse 2. (For detail of the function, see 9.10 Reset Functions.)
・Select "Reset D/T 1" in selecting the status input function assignment.
enabled:
9.15.5 Totalizer 2 reset (Reset Total 2)

work in synchronism with pulse output. When an input arrives across status input terminals, counter 2
and totalizer 2 are reset to 0.
respond to pulse 2. (For detail of the function, see 9.10 Reset Function.)
・Select "Reset C/T 2" in selecting the status input function assignment.
enabled:
108
L--740--28--E
9.16 High/Low Alarm Function NOTE: For this function, the setting change is disabled
The transmitter provides the operator with quick grasp of conditions of the installation － flowrate,
temperature, density and total flow － when high/low alarms are set up. In the event the preset alarm
conditions are met, it tells the operator the event with an alarm message along with a status output signal.
Setup procedure and behavior of alarm functions are described below:
(1) Setup procedure
Ensure positive settings on individual items.
① Status output function assignment (Function) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-1].)
To use high/low alarm function, it is essential to assign high/low alarms to status output.
Set "H/L Alarm" to status output function assignment.
("H/L Alarm" setting is required even in cases of high alarm only or low alarm only.)
② Output mode of status output (Mode) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-3].)
Set up the output mode of status output.
・Active output of status output: Off Active or On Active
(For detail of the status output function, see 9.14 Status Output Function.)
③ Assignment of H/L alarm values (Assign) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-6-1].)
From the following options, select the variables against which the transmitter identifies
alarmed conditions.
・Dens: Density
④ Alarm type selection (H/L Alm. Type) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-6-2].)
Select alarm type from the following options.
・To validate only high alarm, select "High Alarm".
・To validate only low alarm, select "Low Alarm".
・To validate both high and low alarms, select t "H/L Alarm".
⑤ High alarm value setting (High Alm. Po.) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-6-3].)
If the input exceeds this setting, the high alarm is activated. Set the high alarm value
desired.
In the case "Low Alarm" is set in ④, setting is not required.
⑥ Low alarm value setting (Low Alm. Po.) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-6-4].)
・Low Alm. Po.: Low alarm value
In the case "High Alarm" is set in ④, setting is not required.
⑦ Hysteresis value setting for high/low alarms (H/L Alm. hys)
The setting determines a dead (or immunity) zone following the occurrence of an alarm.
Select a larger value when measurement fluctuates excessively; select a smaller value if
fast recovery from alarmed condition is desired.
109
L--740--28--E
(2) An example of settings and assignments

Status output assignment (Function): H/L Alarm
Active output of status output (Mode): Off Active
H/L alarm value assignment (Assign): Mass Flow
Alarm type selection (H/L Alm. Type): H/L Alarm
High alarm value setting (High Alm. Po.): 900 [kg/min]
Low alarm value setting (Low Alm. Po.): 200 [kg/min]
High/low alarm hysteresis value setting (H/L Alm. hys): 100 [kg/min]
Instant mass flowrate [kg/min]
900 High alarm
800
｝ [900]
700
Hysteresis
600
of H/L alarm
500 [100]
400
｝
300
200 Low alarm
[200]
100
0
Status output
Time
Open
Short
H/L alm active H/L alm active
Low alarm arises Low alarm canceled as instant High alarm arises High alarm canceled as
as instant mass mass flowrate exceeds [low as instant mass instant mass flowrate falls
flowrate falls below alarm + H/L alarm hysteresis]. flowrate exceeds below [high alarm + H/L alarm
low alarm value. low alarm value. hysteresis].
110
L--740--28--E
9.17 Gas Mixed Flow Alarm Function NOTE: For this function, the setting change is disabled
If gases exist in large quantities in the process fluid, it is impossible to make accurate flow measurement.
This feature, if correctly set up, detects gases entrapped in the fluid, indicates a slug flow alarm, clamps
the flow signal at 0, and provides a status output telling the operator the alarm event. (If you want to use
this function, set the higher limit density value of slug flow to 10 (default) and the lower limit density value
of slug flow to 0 (default). This function then remains disabled.) The setup procedure of slug flow function
is outlined below.
(1) Setup procedure
Ensure positive settings of individual items.
① Lower limit density of slug flow (Slug Low) (See 9.2.3 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-2-3].)
Upon detection of density smaller than this setting, the circuitry interprets it as slug flow
and starts analysis.
Set a value small enough with respect to the density expected for the fluid of interest.
② Higher limit density of slug flow (Slug High) (See 9.2.4 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-2-4].)
Upon detection of density larger than this setting, the circuitry interprets it as an error and
starts analysis.
Set a value large enough with respect to the density expected for the fluid of interest.
③ Slug flow identification time (Slug Duration) (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-2-5].)
It is the time required for the circuitry to identify the slug flow being outside the slug flow
high/low limit and to issue a slug flow alarm (sec). Until this slug flow identification time
expires, it retains the most recent and properly measured value. After the expiration of this
preset time, the flowrate becomes 0.
④ If you want to assign this slug flow alarm in the status output function to the status output,
setting the following is required: (For detail of this output function, see 9.14 Status Output
Function.)
・Status output function assignment: Error Status (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (2) [No. 2-4-
5-1].)
・Slug flow error select: On (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4) [No. 2-4-5-2-7].)
・Active output of status output: Off Active or On Active (See 9.2.5 Transition chart (4)
[No. 2-4-5-3].)
111
L--740--28--E
(2) An example of settings and behavior

・Lower limit density value of slug flow: 0.5 [g/mL]
・Upper limit density value of slug flow: 2.0 [g/mL]
・Slug flow identification time: 10 [sec]
2.0 "Higher limit density [2.0]"

Density [g/mL]
Density
0.5 "Lower limit density [0.5]"
0
Time
Slug flow identifi- 10sec Slug flow identifi- 10sec
cation time cation time
Flowrate with slug flow alarm active
Flowrate [kg/min]
Flowrate with slug flow alarm inactive
0
Time
Slug flow Slug flow Slug flow Slug flow
under alarm active under alarm active
test test
Density fell Alarm canceled Density Alarm canceled

below high limit as density exceeded high as density fell
value; slug flow exceeded low limit value; slug below high limit
test starts with limit value. flow test starts value.
flow data with flow data
Density fell below low limit Density exceeded high limit

value; as slug flow test value; as slug flow test
duration expires, a slug flow duration expires, a slug flow
alarm is issued with flowrate alarm is issued with flowrate
112
L--740--28--E
9.18 Setup Units List

Measurement type No. Acceptable setup units LCD display
M-1 g/sec g/s
M-2 g/min g/min
M-3 g/hr g/h
M-4 kg/sec kg/s
M-5 kg/min kg/min
M-6 kg/hr kg/h
M-7 kg/day kg/d
M-8 MetTon/min Mt/min
Instant mass
M-9 MetTon/hr Mt/h
flowrate
M-10 MetTon/day Mt/d
M-11 lb/sec lb/s
M-12 lb/min lb/min
M-13 lb/hr lb/h
M-14 lb/day lb/d
M-15 ShTon/min St/min
M-16 ShTon/hr St/h
M-17 ShTon/day St/d
V-1 ml/sec mL/s
V-2 ml/min mL/min
V-3 ml/hr mL/h
V-4 liter/sec L/s
V-5 liter/min L/min
V-6 liter/hr L/h
V-7 liter/day L/d
V-8 CuMtr/sec Cm/s
V-9 CuMtr/min Cm/min
V-10 CuMtr/hr Cm/h
V-11 CuMtr/day Cm/d
Instant volume
V-12 gal/sec ga/s
flowrate
V-13 gal/min ga/min
V-14 ImpGal/min Ig/min
V-15 ImpGal/hr Ig/h
V-16 ImpGal/day Ig/d
V-17 CuFt/sec Cf/s
V-18 CuFt/min Cf/min
V-19 CuFt/hr Cf/h
V-20 bbl/sec bl/s
V-21 bbl/min bl/min
V-22 bbl/hr bl/h
V-23 bbl/day bl/d
D-1 g/ml g/mL
D-2 g/cc g/cc
D-3 kg/l kg/L
Density D-4 kg/CuMtr kg/Cum
D-5 lb/gal lb/gal
D-6 lb/CuFt lb/Cf
D-7 SGU SGU
T-1 ° C deg C
T-2 °F deg F
Temperature
T-3 Kelvin Kelvin
T-4 °R deg R
113
Indications in error Influences on output in an error
Error Status Description Coping action RED GRN Backlight Analog Analog Pulse Pulse Status
114
type (Status display)
LED LED （※1） Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 Output 2 Output
Analog Output 1 21.6mA None
Analog output 1 out of －10 to 110(%) range; failure Measurement is out of range. Adjust measurement
Saturated
to produce proper output. such that measurement selected falls within [lower 2.4mA None
(Ana. Out 1 Satur) Unaffected
limit of analog output to upper limit value], or modify Per
Analog Output 2 Saturated Analog output 2 out of －10 to 110(%) range; failure None 21.6mA
Saturated setting. (※6) status
(Ana. Out 2 Satur） to produce proper output. Blink ON OFF None 2.4mA
Alarm select
L--740--28--E
Pulse Output 1 Saturated Pulse output 1 exceeds 11kHz; failure to produce (※7)
Instant flowrate selected exceeds full scale flowrate 11KHz None
(Pls. Out 1 Satur) proper output.
of pulse output. Lower instant flowrate for use or Unaffected
Pulse Output 2 Saturated
(Pls. Out 2 Satur)
Pulse output 2 exceeds 11kHz; failure to produce
proper output.
increase full scale flowrate setting. (※5) None 11KHz contact the factory.
A fault in drive oil connections is a possibility. Verify
Drive Input Out of Range Drive frequency out of normal range; failure to make
drive coil connections by self diagnostics.
10. MAINTENANCE
(Drive OutOfRange) proper measurement.

(For details,see 9.6.2 Drive coil check.) 10.1 Error Messages
Scale Over Mass flowrate exceeds 110% of max. allowable Mass flowrate exceeds the specification.
(Scale Over) range; possible failure to make proper measurement. Use within the maximum allowable range.
Temperature Out of A fault in temperature sensor is a possibility. Verify
Temperature out of normal range, failure to make
Range temperature sensor connections by self diagnostics.
proper measurement.
(Temp OutOfRange) (For details,see 9.6.3 Transmitter check.)
Density Outside Limits Density measured out of normal range (0 to 5[g/mL], Bubble entrapment is a possibility. Per error Per
Per error output
Sensor (Density Outside) failure to make proper measurement. Check for bubble entrapment. ORG output status
ON OFF Setting
Failure A fault in pickoff sensor is a possibility. Verify pickoff (※4) Setting select
P.O. Sig Error(P.O. Sig Pickoff signal voltage out of normal range, failure to (※6)
coil connections by self diagnostics. (※5) (※7)
Err) make proper measurement.
(For details,see 9.6.3 Transmitter check.)
Temperature Connect Error A fault possible in temperature sensor wiring A fault in temperature sensor is a possibility. Check
(Temp Connect Err) connections temperature sensor connections.
P.O. Connect Error A fault in pickoff coil connections.
A fault possible in pickoff sensor wiring connections
(P.O. Connect Err) Check pickoff coil connections for condition.
A fault in drive coil connections. Check drive coil
connections. (This error does not show up in
Drive Coil Error A fault possible in drive coil wiring connections
measurement. Upon error diction, be sure to verify
drive coil connections by self diagnostics.)
EEPROM Error Blink ORG
An error in parameters; inactive operation A fault in EEPROM is suspected. Contact the factory. OFF 2.4mA Stopped OFF
Transmitter (EEPROM Err) (※2) (※4)
Failure Data Update Error A fault in transmitter is suspected. Contact the ORG Per error output Per error output Status
A fault in internal data ON OFF
(Data Update Err) factory. (※4) setting (※3, 6) setting (※3, 5) Select (※7)
Analog 1 Set Alarm Parameter setting of analog output 1 or analog
(Ana. 1 Set Alm.) output 2 comes under any of the following conditions
Verify parameters and reconfigure to acceptable
・Upper limit < lower limit
Analog 2 Set Alarm values. (※6)
・Upper limit or lower limit > max. acceptable setting Per error
(Ana. 2 Set Alm.) ・Upper limit or lower limit < max. acceptable setting Per error output Status
Parameter output
Blink ON OFF setting Select
Alarm H/L alarm parameter setting comes under any of the setting
(※6) (※7)
H/L Alarm Point Set following conditions (※5)
Verify parameters and reconfigure to acceptable
Alarm ・High alarm < Low alarm
values. (For details, see 9.16 H/L Alarm Functions.)
(H/L po.Set Alm.) ・High alarm or low alarm > max. acceptable setting
・High alarm or low alarm < max. acceptable setting
Calibration Auto Zero Failed Wait until the fluid flow settles down to a steady state Status
Auto zero offset (correction) is out of normal range. Blink OFF OFF Unaffected Unaffected
Failure (Auto Zero Fail) and retry zeroing. Select (※7)
Stays on for a preset duration (slug flow check) upon Only flow output
Clamped Status
Slug Flow Slug Flow Alarm detention of gas entrapment Air entrapment in the fluid is a possibility. Verify the Clamped
Blink ON OFF Select
Alarm (Slug Flow) After expiration of slug flow check duration upon gas fluid and line for conditions.
Flow output at "0" Stopped (※7)
entrapment detection
High ambient temperature cause a rise in the
Xmtr Temperature Alarm Transmitter’
s internal temperature is unusual (above transmitter’s internal temperature, leading to shorten
Transmitter Blink ON OFF Continued Continued Status
(Txr Temp Alm.) 80°). life of components. Take necessary step to lower Select
Alarm ambient temperature. (※7)
Switch Alarm(Switch Alm.) Faulty operating switches Faulty switch operation. Contact the factory. OFF ON OFF Continued Continued
※1: Even with the run indicator staying off, the white backlight comes on in response to switch operation when backlight is set in the "ON" or "sleep".
※2: In an alarm, the LED blinks at a faster rate (at intervals of 100ms) than in other alarms (at intervals of 250ms).
※3: Outputs can go uncontrolled under certain circumstances if the transmitter fails, however.
※4: For 5 minutes after occurrence of an alarm condition (or sleep duration of backlight setting), the ORG backlight comes on; after which it will blink on and off.
※5: For details,see 9.12 Pulse Output Function.
※6: For details,see 9.13 Analog Output Function.
of trouble and finding necessary corrective action. If the problem persists, or if you have any question,
nature. Sections 10.1 Error Messages and 10.2 Status Messages will assist you in identifying the cause
In the event an error occurs, an error message appears at the bottom of LCD display. Make sure of its
※7: For details,see 9.14 Status Output Function.

Indications in error Influences on output in an error
Status Status Description RED GRN Backlight Analog Analog Pulse Pulse Status
type (Status display) LED LED （※1） Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 Output 2 Output
Analog Output 1 Fixed
Analog output 1 fixed is active (※2) Fixed output Unaffected
(Ana. Out 1 Fix)
Unaffected
Analog Output 2 Fixed
Analog output 2 fixed is active (※2) Unaffected Fixed output
(Ana. Out 2 Fix)
Unaffected
Pulse Output 1 Fixed
Pulse output 1 fixed is active (※2) Fixed output Unaffected
(Pls. Out 1 Fix)
Fixed Output Pulse Output 2 Fixed OFF Blink OFF Unaffected
Pulse output 2 fixed is active (※2) Unaffected Fixed output
(Pls. Out 2 Fix)
Status Output Fixed
Status output fixed is active (※2) Unaffected Unaffected Fixed output
(Status Out Fix)
0% Sig Lock With a status input, 0% signal lock is active. (※2)
4mA Stopped Unaffected
(0% Sig Lock) (Analog output clamped at 4mA with no pulse output.)
OFF while ORG
indicator blinks at
Calibration Calibration in Progress
Auto zero in progress OFF Blink operation startup Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
in Progress (Cal. in Progress)
and shutoff.
OFF during the test
H/L Alarm Triggered H/L alarm occurred and is active.
H/L Alarm OFF Blink OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
(H/L Alm. Trig.) (For details, see 9.16 High/Low Alarm Function.)
Drive Out Drive Out Alarm
Drive output is exceeds the threshold. OFF Blink OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
Alarm (Drive Out Alarm)
Self Diagnosis
Self diagnosis in progress OFF Blink OFF 0％ Stopped Unaffected
10.2 A List of Status Messages
(Self-Diag)
Installation
Pipeline vibration check in progress OFF Blink OFF 0％ Stopped Unaffected
(Installation)
Test
Unaffected
Maintenance Test Unaffected Unaffected (Set output
Maintenance in progress OFF Blink OFF
(Maintenance Test) (Set output during simulated output) (Set output during simulated output) during simulated
output)
If parameter change is made by switch operation while
Key Protect
the Key Protect was ON. OFF ON OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
(Key protect.)
(If key operation is required, reconfiguration is needed.)
When the target parameter is changed or the operation
Write protect. for executing the target function is carried out in Write OFF ON OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
Protect mode.
When the number of run hours has exceeded 100,000
hours, it could lead to component failure or degradation.
Xmtr Operating-Time Over
We suggest transmitter replacement. OFF ON OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
Transmitter ("○" blinks at lower left of LCD)
(You can cancel indicator ○.
Operation
See 9.2.7 Transition chart (6) [No. 4-3].)
Warmup in progress
Xmtr Warm up
(Stays on for 20 minutes upon power on. Countdown OFF ON OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
(WARMUP 20)
value decrements at one (1) minute intervals.)
Poor power supply condition is a possibility. (A short
duration power cycling has occurred a couple of times.)
Power OK ? While there is no problem in continuation of operation, OFF ON OFF Unaffected Unaffected Unaffected
we suggest to run a check for condition of power supply.
This message goes out automatically in 20 minutes.
※1: Even with the run indicator staying off, the white backlight comes on in response to switch operation if backlight is set in the sleep mode.
※2: Simulated output is available irrespective of the state of alarm. (Certain types of error disables output, however.)
115
L--740--28--E
L--740--28--E
10.3 Replacement Parts

We recommend to keep a stock of replacement parts in case anything goes wrong. Replacement parts
are available at the OVAL representative in your area or OVAL Customer Service Department. Please
supply us with the flowmeter model, part name, product number, and quantity when you order.
Interconnect cable (Teflon or PVC): Quantity 1
Replacement of parts such as o-rings and sheet packing for transmitter and
terminal box
O-rings and gaskets are used as sealing components with limited service life.
Although the exact service life depends on the operating environment, periodic replacement is
recommended. Recommended replacement period: 5 to 8 years after the delivery
CAUTION: 1. Whenever you open or disassemble the instrument, inspect the O-rings
and gaskets. Replace the deteriorated parts.
2. To ensure the soundness, periodic re-torquing of the corresponding parts
is recommended.
Corresponding parts:
Transmitter: O-ring between display lid (front) - body
Transmitter: O-ring between terminal box lid (rear) - body
Transmitter: Sheet packing between side lid - body
Transmitter: O-ring between adopter - body (Integral type only)
Transmitter: O-ring on sensor unit (Integral type only)
O-ring between terminal box - lid (Separate type only)
Cable gland: rubber seal and O-ring
Please contact the OVAL sales office when replacement is necessary
116
L--740--28--E
10.4 Explosionproof Specification

10.4.1 TIIS explosionproof
Applicable standard: JNIOSH-TR-43-1 / JNIOSH-TR-43-2 / JNIOSH-TR-43-6
　　　　　　　　 JNIOSH-TR-46-1 / JNIOSH-TR-46-2 / JNIOSH-TR-46-6
● Integral type
Converter symbol: Ex d [ib] ⅡC T4X
Detector symbol: Ex ib ⅡC T3 Gb, T4（CA series）
Ex ib ⅡC T3, T4（CB and CS series）
Ambient temp.: -40℃ to +55℃ ( -20℃ to +50℃ when connected with CS080 and CB040/050)
Fluid Temperature: As shown on Detector Model Specification Table 1
Ex-proof applied temp.: +59℃
Power source: AC220V 50/60Hz（100mA） , or DC30V（260mA）
Allowable voltage: AC250V 50/60Hz, DC250V
Communication: HART, Modbus PROFIBUS and FOUNDATION Fieldbus (FISCO)
NOTES: ※ If group of the detector is ⅡB, applicable gas for explosionproof configuration is limited
toⅡB as well.
※ If the temperature class of detector is T3, applicable explosive atmosphere is limited to up
to T3 as well.
● Separate type:
Converter symbol: Ex d [ib] ⅡC T6X
Detector Ambient Temp.: As shown on Detector Model Specification Table 1
Fluid Temperature:　 As shown on Detector Model Specification Table 1
Detector symbol: Ex ib ⅡB / ⅡC T1, T2, T3, T4, T5（CA series）
Ex ib ⅡB T3, T4（CB, CS series）
Converter Ambient Temp.: -40℃ to +55℃
Power source: AC220V 50/60Hz（100mA）, or DC30V（260mA）
Allowable voltage: AC250V 50/60Hz, DC250V
Explanation about subject model codes

Model code: C①②③④-x⑤xxx-1⑥x-1⑦⑧x⑨x-x
Position Meaning Value Description
① Sensor Series A CA series
B CB series
S CS series
②③④ Nominal Size 00A to 250 CA00A, CA001, CA003, CA006, CA010, CA015, CA025, CA040, CA050,
CA080, CA100, CA150, CA15H, CA200, CA20H and CA250
006 to 050 CB006, CB010, CB015, CB025, CB040 and CB050
010 to 080 CS010, CS015, CS025, CS040, CS050, CSR50 and CS080
⑤ Temperature 1 Standard（-40℃ to +130℃）
Classification 2 Standard（+130℃ to +200℃）
3 High temp.（+200℃ to +350℃）
4 Low temp.（-200℃ to +50℃）
⑥ Temperature Class 1 T1: Applicable sensor sizes CA025 to CA150
2 T2: Applicable sensor sizes CA003 to CA250
3 or 4 T3 or T4: All sensor sizes applicable
⑦ Converter Installation 1 Integrally mounted models
Structure 2 Separately mounted models
⑧ Power Source 1 20 to 30VDC
2 85 to 264VAC (Safety Rating: 100 to 240VAC) 50/60Hz
⑨ Communication 1 HART Communication (HART Protocol Version 7, Bell 202)
Configuration 2 FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 Communication (ITK Version 6)
3 PROFIBUS PA Communication (Profile Version 3.02)
4 Modbus Communication (RS-485 Modbus Protocol)
117
L--740--28--E
10.4.2 ATEX , IECEx explosionproof

Converter ： DEKRA 11ATEX0171X IECEx DEK 12.0053X
Applicable standards： EN 60079-0:2012, EN 60079-1:2007, EN 60079-11:2012
IEC 60079-0:2011, IEC 60079-1:2007-04, IEC 60079-11:2011
Detector ： DEKRA 11ATEX0172 IECEx DEK 13.0001
Applicable standards： EN 60079-0:2012, EN 60079-11:2012
IEC 60079-0:2011, IEC 60079-11:2011
● Integral type
Converter symbol: Ⅱ2G Ex db ib ⅡC T4 Gb (When connected with CA series)
Ⅱ2G Ex db ib ⅡB T4 Gb (When connected with CB and CS series)
Detector symbol: Ⅱ2G Ex ib ⅡC T4 Gb (CA series)
Ⅱ2G Ex ib ⅡB T4 Gb (CB, CS series)
Ambient temp.: -40℃ to +55℃ (-20℃ to +55℃ when connected with CS080 and CB040/050)
Detector to be connected: CA006 to CA250
CB006 to CB050
CS010 to CS080
Fluid temp.: As shown on Detector Model Specification Table 2
Power source: AC100 to 240V 50/60Hz, or DC20 to 30V
Allowable voltage Um= 250V
Communication: HART, Modbus, PROFIBUS and FOUNDATION Fieldbus (FISCO)
● Separate type
Converter symbol: Ⅱ2G Ex db［ib］ ⅡC T6 Gb
Detector symbol: Ⅱ2G Ex ib ⅡC T1,T2,T3,T4,T5 (CA series)
Ⅱ2G Ex ib ⅡB T3, T4 (CB, CS series)
Fluid Temp.: As shown on Detector Model Specification Table 2
Allowable voltage: Um= 250V
Communication: HART, Modbus, PROFIBUS and FOUNDATION Fieldbus (FISCO)
B CB series
S CS series
3 High temp.（+200℃ to +350℃）
4 Low temp.（-200℃ to +50℃）
118
L--740--28--E
10.4.3 KCs Explosionproof

Transmitter: 14-AV4BO-0607 (Integral type), 14-AV4BO-0608 (Separate type)
Detector: 14-AV4BO-0609 (CA 006 to CA150), 15-KA4BO-0192 (CA15H, CA200),
15-KA4BO-0193 (CA20H, CA250), 12-AV4BO-0579 (CB series) and
12-AV4BO-0578 (CS series)
● Integral type
Transmitter symbol: Ex d ib ⅡB T4
Detector symbol: Ex ib ⅡC T4 (CA series)
Ex ib ⅡB T4 (CB, CS series)
Ambient temp.: -40℃ to +55℃ (-20℃ to +55℃ only when connected with CS080)
CB006 to CB050
CS010 to CS080
Power source: AC240V 50 / 60Hz, or DC30V
Allowable voltage: Um= 250V
Communication: HART, Modbus, PROFIBUS and FOUNDATION Fieldbus（FISCO）
● Separate type
Transmitter symbol: Ex d［ib］ⅡC T6
Detector symbol: Ex ib ⅡC T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 (CA series)
Ex ib ⅡB T3, T4 (CB, CS series)
Fluid Temp: As shown on Detector Model Specification Table 2
Power source: AC240V 50/60Hz, or DC30V
Allowable voltage: Um=250V
Communication: HART, Modbus, PROFIBUS and FOUNDATION Fieldbus（FISCO）

B CB series
S CS series
②③④ Nominal Diameter 00A to 250 CA00A, CA001, CA003, CA006, CA010, CA015, CA025, CA040, CA050,
010 to 080 CS010, CS015, CS025, CS040, CS050 and CS080
3 High temp.（+200℃ to +350℃）
4 Low temp.（-200℃ to +50℃）
119
L--740--28--E
10.4.4 CSA explosionproof

Converter： 70007590
Detector： 70011628
Applicable standard:
　 Detector
CAN/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 0-10
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.61010-1-12 (3rd Edition)
UL Std. No. 61010-1 (3rd Edition)
CAN/CSA Standard C22.2No. 60079-0:11
ANSI/UL 60079-0 (2009)
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.60079-11:11
IEC 60079-11 Edition 6
UL ND 60079-11(Ed. 6)
　 Transmitter
CAN/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 0-10
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1-12 (3rd Edition)
UL Std. No. 61010-1 (3rd Edition)
CAN/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 60079-0:11 December 2011
CAN/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 60079-1:11 December 2011
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-11:11 December 2011
ANSI/UL 60079-0 (2009) Fifth Edition
ANSI/UL 60079-1 (2009) Sixth Edition
ANSI/UL 60079-11 (2013) Sixth Edition
● Integral type
Converter symbol: ClassⅠ, Zone 1, Ex d ib ⅡC T4 Gb
ClassⅠ, Zone 1, AEx d ib ⅡC T4 Gb
(CA, CB, CS series integral type)
Detector symbol: ClassⅠ, Zone 1, Ex ib ⅡC T4 Gb
ClassⅠ, Zone 1, AEx ib ⅡC T4 Gb
CB006 to CB050
CS010 to CS080
Field temp.: As shown on Detector Model Specification Table 2
● Separate type
Transmitter symbol: ClassⅠ, Zone 1, Ex d [ib] ⅡC T6 Gb
　　 ClassⅠ, Zone 1, AEx d [ib] ⅡC T6 Gb
Detector symbol: CA series: ClassⅠ, Zone 1, Ex ib ⅡC T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 Gb
ClassⅠ, Zone 1, AEx ib ⅡC T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 Gb
CB series: ClassⅠ, Zone 1, Ex ib ⅡB T3, T4 Gb
ClassⅠ, Zone 1, AEx ib ⅡB T3, T4 Gb
CS series: ClassⅠ, Zone 1, Ex ib ⅡC T3, T4 Gb
ClassⅠ, Zone 1, AEx ib ⅡC T3, T4 Gb
120
L--740--28--E

B CB series
S CS series
3 High temp.（+200℃ to +350℃）
4 Low temp.（-200℃ to +50℃）
121
L--740--28--E
10.4.5 EAC explosionproof

No TC RU C-JP.Γb05.B.00629
Applicable standard: ΓOCT 30852.0-2002 (MeK 60079-0:1983)
ΓOCT 30852.1-2002 (Mek 60079-1:1998)
ΓOCT 30852.10-2002 (Mek 60079-11:1999)
● Integral type
Converter symbol: 1 Ex d ib ⅡC T4X (When connected with CA series)
1 Ex d ib ⅡB T4X (When connected with CB and CS series)
Detector symbol: 1 Ex ib ⅡC T4 (CA series)
1 Ex ib ⅡB T4 (CB, CS series)
CB006 to CB050
CS010 to CS080
Communication: HART, Modbus, PROFIBUS or FOUNDATION Fieldbus（FISCO）
● Separate type
Converter symbol: 1 Ex d［ib］ ⅡC T6X
Detector symbol: 1 Ex ib ⅡC T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, Gb (CA series)
1 Ex ib ⅡB T3, T4 (CB, CS series)

B CB series
S CS series
3 High temp.（+200℃ to +350℃）
4 Low temp.（-200℃ to +50℃）
122
L--740--28--E
10.4.6 NEPSI explosionproof

No GYJ14.1254X (Separate type)
GYJ14.1255X (Separate type)
GYJ14.1256X (Integral type)
Applicable standard： GB3836.1-2010 Explosive atmospheres-Part 1: Equipment-General requirements
GB3836.2-2010 Explosive atmospheres-Part 2: Equipment protection by flameproof enclosure“d”
GB3836.4-2010 Explosive atmospheres-Part 4: Equipment protection by intrinsic safety“i”
● Integral type
Converter symbol: Ex d ib ⅡC T4 Gb (When connected with CA series)
Ex d ib ⅡB T4 Gb (When connected with CB and CS series)
Detector symbol: Ex ib ⅡC T4 Gb (CA series)
Ex ib ⅡB T4 Gb (CB, CS series)
CB006 to CB050
CS010 to CS080
Allowable source: Um=250V
Communication: HART, Modbus
● Separate type
Converter symbol: Ex d［ib］ⅡC T6 Gb
Detector symbol: Ex ib ⅡC T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 Gb (CA series)
Ex ib ⅡB T3, T4 Gb (CB and CS series)
Communication: HART, Modbus
B CB series
S CS series
3 High temp.（+200℃ to +350℃）
4 Low temp.（-200℃ to +50℃）
Configuration 4 Modbus Communication (RS-485 Modbus Protocol)
123
L--740--28--E
10.4.7 ITRI explosionproof

Registration Notification Number: ML041200701G89
● Integral type
Converter symbol: Ex d ib ⅡC T4 Gb (When connected with CA series)
Ex d ib ⅡB T4 Gb (When connected with CB and CS series)
Detector symbol: Ex ib ⅡC T4 Gb (CA series)
Ex ib ⅡB T4 Gb (CB, CS series)
CB006 to CB050
CS010 to CS080
● Separate type
Converter symbol: Ex d［ib］ ⅡC T6 Gb X
Detector symbol: Ex ib ⅡC T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, (CA series)
Ex ib ⅡB T3, T4 (CB, CS series)

B CB series
S CS series
3 High temp.（+200℃ to +350℃）
4 Low temp.（-200℃ to +50℃）
124
L--740--28--E
10.4.8 Detector model specification table 1（TIIS explosionproof）

Temperature class T1 T2 T3
CA Type （Xmtr-detector：spec.）（Xmtr-detector：separate type）（Xmtr-detector：separate type）（Xmtr-detector：separate type）
Group ⅡB ⅡC ⅡC ⅡC
CA00A －－－ -40℃ to +60℃ /
CA001 －－－ -40℃ to +150℃
-20℃ to +60℃ / -20℃ to +60℃ /
CA003 －－
-20℃ to +200℃ -20℃ to +150℃
Model
CA006 / CA010 －－
Ambient CA015 －－
temp./ CA025 -20℃ to +60℃ / －
Measuvable CA040 / CA050 -20℃ to +350℃ － -40℃ to +60℃ / -40℃ to +60℃ /
fluid temp.
CA080 － -20℃ to +60℃ / -40℃ to +200℃ -40℃ to +150℃
CA100 / CA150 － -20℃ to +350℃
CA15H / CA200 －－
CA20H / CA250 －－
Temperature class T3 T4 T4 T5
CA Type （Xmtr-detector：spec.）（Xmtr-detector：Integral type）（Xmtr-detector：separate type）（Xmtr-detector：Integral type）（Xmtr-detector：separate type）
Group ⅡC
CA00A － -40℃ to +60℃ / －－
CA001 － -40℃ to +80℃ －－
-20℃ to +60℃ /
CA003 －－－
-20℃ to +90℃
Model
CA006 / CA010 －
Ambient CA015 －
temp./ CA025
Measuvable CA040 / CA050 -40℃ to +55℃ / -40℃ to +60℃ / -40℃ to +55℃ /
fluid temp.
CA080 -40℃ to +150℃ -40℃ to +80℃ -40℃ to +80℃ -20℃ to +50℃ /
CA100 / CA150 -200℃ to +50℃
CA15H / CA200
CA20H / CA250
CB Type （Xmtr-detector：spec.）（Xmtr-detector：separate type）（Xmtr-detector：Integral type）（Xmtr-detector：separate type）
Group ⅡB
-40℃ to +55℃ / -40℃ to +60℃ /
CB006 / CB010
Model -40℃ to +80℃ -40℃ to +80℃
-40℃ to +60℃ / -40℃ to +55℃ / -40℃ to +60℃ /
CB015
Ambient -40℃ to +125℃ -40℃ to +70℃ -40℃ to +70℃
temp./ -40℃ to +55℃ / -40℃ to +60℃ /
Measuvable CB025
-40℃ to +80℃ -40℃ to +80℃
fluid temp. -20℃ to +60℃ / -20℃ to +55℃ / -20℃ to +60℃ /
CB040 / CB050
-20℃ to +125℃ -20℃ to +80℃ -20℃ to +80℃
CS Type （Xmtr-detector：spec.）（Xmtr-detector：separate type）（Xmtr-detector：Integral type）（Xmtr-detector：separate type）
Group ⅡB
CS010 / CS015
Model
CS025 -40℃ to +60℃ / -40℃ to +55℃ / -40℃ to +60℃ /
Ambient CS040 -40℃ to +130℃ -40℃ to +80℃ -40℃ to +80℃
temp./ CS050 / CSR50
Measuvable
CS080
-20℃ to +130℃ -20℃ to +80℃ -20℃ to +80℃
125
L--740--28--E
10.4.9 Detector model specification table 2

（ATEX, IECEx, KCs, CSA, EAC, NEPSI, ITRI explosionproof）
Temperature class T1 T2 T3 T4 T4 T5
CA Type （Xmtr-detector：spec.） separate type separate type separate type Integral type separate type separate type
Group ⅡC
CA00A －－－
CA001 －－－
CA003 －－
CA006 / CA010 －－
Model
CA015 －－
Ambient -40℃ to +60℃ / -40℃ to +55℃ / -40℃ to +60℃ /
CA025
temp./ -40℃ to +150℃ -40℃ to +80℃ -40℃ to +80℃
-40℃ to +60℃ /
Measuvable CA040 / CA050 -20℃ to +50℃ / -40℃ to +200℃
fluid temp.
CA080 -20℃ to +350℃
-20℃ to +50℃ /
CA100 / CA150 -200℃ to +50℃
CA15H / CA200 －
CA20H / CA250 －
CB Type （Xmtr-detector：spec.） separate type Integral type separate type
Group ⅡB
-40℃ to +55℃ / -40℃ to +60℃ /
CB006 / CB010
-40℃ to +80℃ -40℃ to +80℃
Model
-40℃ to +60℃ / -40℃ to +55℃ / -40℃ to +60℃ /
CB015
-40℃ to +125℃ -40℃ to +70℃ -40℃ to +70℃
Ambient
temp./
-40℃ to +55℃ / -40℃ to +60℃ /
Measuvable CB025
-40℃ to +80℃ -40℃ to +80℃
fluid temp.
-40℃ to +60℃ / -20℃ to +55℃ / -20℃ to +60℃ /
CB040 / CB050
-40℃ to +125℃ -20℃ to +80℃ -20℃ to +80℃
CS Type （Xmtr-detector：spec.） separate type Integral type separate type
Group ⅡB
CS010 / CS015
Model CS025 -40℃ to +60℃ / -40℃ to +55℃ / -40℃ to +60℃ /
CS040 -40℃ to +130℃ -40℃ to +80℃ -40℃ to +80℃
Ambient
temp./
CS050 / CSR50
Measuvable
CS080
-20℃ to +130℃ -20℃ to +80℃ -20℃ to +80℃
126
L--740--28--E
10.4.10 Electric wire connection part of integral type / separate type converters
■ TIIS, NEPSI explosionproof
Use attached cable gland. It is needed to use rubber packing which fits with the outer diameter of using
cable for the cable gland. The cable outer diameters fitting to attached rubber packings are as follows;
Screw Size: G3/4 Screw Size: G3/4
Integral Type Converter Separate Type Converter
Unit: mm
Packing ID Cable OD Remarks
φ9 φ8.1 to φ9.0 Used for the case of FISCO Explosion-proof
φ10 φ9.1 to φ10.0 (Only 1 piece for output)
Cable Gland
φ11 φ10.1 to φ11.0

φ12 φ11.1 to φ12.0 Standard Feature
φ13 φ12.1 to φ13.0 (4 kinds at the left are attached.)
φ14 φ13.1 to φ14.0
Accessories for Converter Electric Wire Connection Part: 2 pieces, Standard Feature Type Cable Gland
〈Caution〉
◆ Seal off properly not to make the infiltration of rain water and dust from cable, rubber packing, screw
　 tightening part and so on.
◆ The use of parts other than attached cable gland is prohibited.
◆ Do not install equipment while leaving the connection of blanking plug attached at shipping.
◆ Please refer to our service center if any parts are missing, damaged and so on.
◆ FISCO Explosionproof is not applicable in case of NEPSI Explosionproof
127
L--740--28--E
■ ATEX, IECEx, EAC explosionproof

Use attached cable gland. It is needed to use rubber packing which fits with the outer diameter of using
cable for the cable gland. The cable outer diameters fitting to attached rubber packings are as follows;
Screw Size: G3/4 or M25×1.5 Screw Size: G3/4 or M25×1.5
Unit: mm
Packing OD Cable OD Remarks
φ9 φ8.1 to φ9.0 Used for the case of FISCO Explosionproof
φ10 φ9.1 to φ10.0 (Only 1 piece for output)
Cable Gland
φ11 φ10.1 to φ11.0

φ12 φ11.1 to φ12.0 Standard Feature
φ13 φ12.1 to φ13.0 (4 kinds at the left are attached.)
φ14 φ13.1 to φ14.0
Accessories for Converter Electric Wire Connection Part: 2 pieces, Standard Feature Type Cable Gland
Remarks) The union part of cable gland (screw size part from the above drawing) is able to be selected from 2
kinds, G3/4 or M25 x 1.5.
〈Caution〉
◆ The use of parts other than attached cable gland is prohibited.
◆ Do not install equipment while leaving the connection of blanking plug attached at shipping.
128
L--740--28--E
■ CSA explosionproof
Adapters are already attached to the electric wire connection port. Use equipment under the status of
adapter connected.
Adapter Adapter
Adapter Adapter
Unit: mm
Manufacturer Model Size of Connecting Screw Outline Drawing of Adapter
Subjected to the connecting
AD-U-11-56・30 3/4”NPT Subjected
screwto size
the connecting
on the Left
screw size on the Left
AD-U-11-56・29 1/2”NPT
REDAPT
AD-U-11-56・05 M25
G3/4
AD-U-11-56・04 M20 G3/4
Accessories for Converter Electric Wire Connection Part

　Adapter 2
Caution in Use of Adapter

◆ Seal off properly not to make the infiltration of rain water and dust from screw tightening part.
Usable Cable Gland
・Conformance Certification : Should have the NRTL Authentication Article

・Explosion-proof Notation : Greater than Class Ⅰ, Zone 1, AEx d ⅡB
・Screw Joint Part : Should be able to connect to the adapter.
・IP Protection Class : Greater than IP66.
・Operating Temperature Range : －40℃ to +60℃
129
L--740--28--E
■ KCs explosionproof
The cable gland is not attached to the electric wire connection port. Please prepare it at customer’
s side.
In addition, the specifications for usable cable gland are as follows;
Usable Cable Gland

・Conformance Certification : The cable gland should be the one which certified for the explosionproof in
South Korea.
・Explosion-proof Notation : Ex d IIC Gb
・Screw Joint Part : G3/4
・IP Protection Class : IP66/67 and higher class
〈Caution〉
◆ Use the cable gland with minimum of 5 screw threads engaged when connecting the cable gland to
the converter electric connection part.
130
L--740--28--E
■ ITRI explosionproof
The cable gland is not attached to the electric wire connection port. Please prepare it at customer’
s side.
In addition, the specifications for usable cable gland are as follows;
Usable Cable Gland

・Conformance Certification : The cable gland should be the one which passed explosion-proof
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　verification in domestic Taiwan.
・Explosion-proof Notation : Ex d ⅡC Gb
・Screw Joint Part : G3/4
・IP Protection Class : Greater than IP66/67
〈Caution Points〉
◆ Use the cable gland with minimum of 5 screw threads engaged when connecting the cable gland to
the converter electric connection part.
131
L--740--28--E
10.4.11 Electric wire connection ports of separate type converter/ separate type detector
■ TIIS, NEPSI explosionproof
A cable gland is already attached to the electric wire connection port of separate type converter and an
adapter is already attached to the electric wire connection ports of separate type detector.
Adapter
■ TIIS, NEPSI Explosionproof
Size of Connecting Screw: G1/2
Cable gland
Size of Connecting Screw: G1/2
Caution in Use of Cable Gland and Adapter

◆ Cable gland and adapter attached are able to be replaced with similar products.
132
L--740--28--E
■ ATEX, IECEx, KCs, CSA and EAC explosionproof

Adapters are already connected to separate type converter and electric wire connection port of detector.
Use equipment under the status of adapter connected.
Adapter
■ ATEX, IECEx, KCs, EAC Explosionproof
Size of Connecting Screw: M20×1.5
Size of Connecting Screw: NPT1/2,
M20×1.5
Caution in Use of Adapter

◆ Seal off properly not to make the infiltration of rain water and dust from screw tightening part.
◆ Adapter attached is able to be replaced with similar products.
133
L--740--28--E
10.5 Ambient Temperature (Type U)

Allowable ambient temperature permitted for the sensor unit is as described in the table below.
(The following table describes the condition for the non-explosionproof models. For the explosionproof
models, make sure to satisfy the temperature conditions described in Section 10.4, as well as the
condition described below.)
Transmitter construction
Sensor unit temp. class
Integral type Separate type
[Sensor unit ambient temp.]
[Fluid temperature] 150℃ and lower
Standard (200℃ and lower) −40℃ to max. ambient temp.
[Ambient temperature] −40 to +55℃
in the graph below
High temperature service model [Sensor unit ambient temp.]
None
(350℃ and lower) −40 to +55℃
Low-temperature explosionproof [Sensor unit ambient temp.]
None
service model −20 to +50℃
Separate type sensor unit (temp. class: standard) Max. ambient temp. range
65
60
55
50
Ambient temperature (℃)
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
0
−200 −150 −100 −50 0 50 100 150 200
Fluid temperature (℃)
MAX. ambient temperature
NOTE: Please contact us in the case the ambient temperature exceeds max. ambient temperature in the graph.
Terminal box
Adapter
Heat insulation can be applied to

the sensor unit itself at the fluid
temperature. However, do not apply
heat insulation to terminal box or
adapter.
134
L--740--28--E
10.6 Precautions on the Explosionproof Specification

10.6.1 About the explosionproof
Special conditions to use the explosionproof equipment safely:
- Prohibition of altering the part constituting the explosionproof performance
Part constitutes the flameproof: Display (glass) – body/terminal lid – parts screwed on the body
Side lid – spigot joint of the body
- Special class of the fastening screw to fix the side lid shall be “A-50”
.
- Transmitter shall be used only in the position specified in the instruction manual.
- Threaded electric conduit shall engage 8 threads min. completely.
- Electric capacitance of the label shall be 1nF max. and to avoid charging of static electricity. Use a
wet cloth to clean the label.
10.6.2 About Cable Gland

■ TIIS, ATEX, IECEx, EAC and NEPSI explosionproof
Please use attached cable gland supplied by OVAL only. Do not use cable gland other than that.
In addition, please refer to the drawing below for the torque value of each part when install the cable
gland and pay attention not to cause slackness, pullout and so on. If there is a gap between packing
and cable, rain water infiltrates and may results in unexpected accident.
Screw: M4
Clamp Union coupling
Gland
G3/4
G3/4
Rubber packing
Gland’s tightening torque: 16 to 36N・m
Clamp’s tightening torques: 1N・m
Fig.10.1
CAUTION
Caution at Assembling
(1) Give the passage of cable through rubber packing, screw in the gland and push the
packing. Screw in the gland until the cable stops.
(2) A hook is attached to the cable gland. After step (1), screw on the clamp with M4 screw
and fix the cable.
135
L--740--28--E
10.6.3 About blanking plug

Since the blanking plug attached at shipping is the screw protecting parts at transportation, pay attention
not to install equipment under the status of connecting these parts.
10.6.4 Insulation performance

Part of transmitter (PA0K) subject to insulation:
IS circuit terminals (separate detector board: TB20, TB21) - Enclosure
Withstand voltage condition: 500VAC, leak current: 3 to 5mA
Due to the built-in noise eliminator between the transmitter power source terminals (TB1’s L and N) and
output terminals (TB2, TB3 and TB4), and the enclosure respectively, complete insulation is not provided.
In case withstand voltage test is conducted across these parts, please conduct under the conditions
below.
Withstand voltage condition: AC200V or DC250V, leak current: 3 to 5mA
10.6.5 Earthing terminal

1. Use GND of power source terminal block or any of external grounding terminals.
2. Use wires of cross section area of 4mm2 min. (AWG11 min.) for grounding.
3. Coating color of the grounding wires shall be green or stripe of green and yellow.
4. Class D grounding is necessary.
5. In case external wirings are used, make sure that the grounding wire is connected with the earth
terminal cover and plain washer in the sketch below.
Cross recess pan head screw
Spring washer
Earth terminal cover
Plain washer
Fig.10.2
10.6.6 About dedicated cable (for only separate type)

1. In case of separate type, a dedicated cable is used for connection between the sensor and
transmitter. Use of other cables are not allowed from the point of explosionproof.
2. Make sure to array the dedicated cable between the sensor and transmitter so that any current and
voltage, which attributable to electromagnetic induction or electrostatic induction and could impair
the IS (intrinsic safety) performance of the IS circuit, is never induced.
136
L--740--28--E
10.6.7 Maintenance and checking

In order to use OVAL’ s Coriolis Flowmeters for long period of time, please perform inspection and
maintenance according to the following items. Also, make sure to check and inspect the Flowmeter while
de-energizing without hazardous gas in the surrounding area.
Check item Description Check

General Is the dedicated cable being used ?
If it is having a mixed touch with other cables, particularly with power supply
lines ?
If the coating is damaged or peeling off ?
Is the dedicated cable properly connected ?
Is the terminal end properly treated ?
Is the separation cover installed ?
Is the lid for the terminal box installed ?
Are bolts and hex socket set screws for fastening the transmitter loose ?
Grounding Is the grounding made properly ?
Is the screw for the grounding terminal loose ?
If the grounding wires are deteriorated ?
Sensor Drive circuit resistance: Resistance range: 50 to 5kΩ *1
Pick-off circuit resistance: Resistance range: 60 to 600Ω *1
Temp. sensor circuit resistance: (100+0.385×Temp.) Ω
*1: There are some differences depending on each sensor and fluid temp.
*2: This measurement is possible only with the separate type. If measured at
the transmitter side, the interconnection resistance of dedicated cable is
added.
Transmitter If any of the connections of display lid, terminal lid or side lid are loose ?
If the part tightened up of cable gland loose ?
Is the packing of the cable gland discolored, hardened, torn, or cracked ?
Is the enclosure and glass deformed or has crack or such ?
*Paint is not regarded to be enclosure.
About handling of grease on bonded surfaces:

If short and deterioration of the grease on the parts below are found through normal use, replenish grease
properly. For this purpose, periodic check is recommended.
Parts screw used: Terminal box – lid (separately mounted only)
137
L--740--28--E
11. EX-INFORMATION
11.1 Nameplates
Explosionproof pertinent information is described (as“PRODUCT”or“Ex”) on the label attached on
the product.
SENSOR SIDE
TRANSMITTER SIDE
Fig.11.1
WARNING: 1. Do not modify or alter components and wiring of the device.

2. See Section 7.10 Wiring Diagram for the details of arrangement and wiring.
3. AFTER-DE-ENERGIZING, delay 3 minutes before opening
138
L--740--28--E
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM (CONTROL DRAWING)
Fig.11.2
NOTES ※1: In case of CS080, the lower limit temp. is -20deg.C

※2: For CA00A, CA001,CA003 and CA High, Low Temp. service model,
only separate types are applicable.
※3: In case of CB006 to CB050, the upper limit temp. is +125deg.C
※4: In case of CS010 to CS080, the upper limit temp. is +130deg.C
139
L--740--28--E
Sensor coil inductance (Li=AA, BB) and internal resistance value

Drive circuit Circuits other than drive circuit
Drive coil Pick off coils
Sensor type Drive Pikckoff
Li max R min resistance Li max R min resistance
（mH）（Ω）（Ω）（mH）（Ω）（Ω）
CA00A －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 8.1 161 8.1 161

4800
CA001 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 8 178 8 178
CA003 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 3.6 76.2 2400 3.6 76.2
CA006/CA010 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 8 162 2000
—
CA015 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 33.7 377
CA025 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 55.6 348 660 8 162
CA040/CA050 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 31 172
CA080 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 400
13.9 89
CA100/CA150 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 270 1.1 18
CA15H/CA200 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 4.9 69 560
220 33 188
CA20H/CA250 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 5.4 79
CA025 －□３□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 0.78 10.3
CA040/CA050 －□３□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 1.43 15.73 75 1.45 13.5 390
CA080/CA100/CA150 －□３□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 0.99 17.9
CA025 －□４□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 55.6 560
CA040/CA050 －□４□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 31 390 8
CA080 －□４□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□
13.9 0 270 0 560
CA100/CA150 －□４□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 1.1
CA15H/CA200 －□４□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 4.9
220 33
CA20H/CA250 －□４□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 5.4
CB006/CB010 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 3.6 69 1000
CB015 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 15.2 159
3.6 69
CB025 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 55.6 358
CB040/CB050 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 31 173
CS010/CS015 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 12.3 202 —
—
CS025 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 15.3 174
CS040 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 8 85 7.2 151
CS050/CSR50 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 6.8 87
CS080 －□□□□□－□□□－□□□□□□－□ 2.9 54
Do not repair the parts related to explosionproof configuration. If such service or repair is required, please
contact OVAL or OVAL representative in your area.
140
L--740--28--E
11.2 About FOUNDATION Fieldbus and FISCO System of PROFIBUS

If the 21st line of product notation is“2: FOUNDATION Fieldbus”or“3: PROFIBUS”, the allowable
parameters of converter connecting to protected fieldbus (FISCO) system are as follows;
Ui = l7.5V, Ii = 380mA, Pi = 5.32W, Ci = negligible value, Li = 10μH
Connection to fieldbus system corresponding to FISCO model becomes possible by the input terminal
(TB4) of converter.
System Configuration
BUSLINE
BUS LINE
(FISCO)
(FISCO)
PAOKTRANSMITTER
PAOK TRANSMITTER
CPUIIIIBOARD
CPU BOARD FB-ABOARD
FB-A BOARD TERMINALBOARD
TERMINAL BOARD
MAIN
MAIN FBK-2
FBK-2
COU
COU BOARD
BOARD
Ui:Ui:17.5V
17.5V
Ii:Ii: 380mA
380mA
Pi:Pi:5.32V
5.32V
Ci:Ci:NEGL
NEGLIGIBLE
IGIBLELOW
LOW
Li:Li:100μH
100μH
SENSOR
SENSOR
CA,CS,
CA, CS,CB
CB
Fig.11.3
Converter label to show the FF and PROFIBUS speftcations
TIIS Explosionproof ATEX Explosionproof
141
L--740--28--E
Bus Line Connection Diagram
BUS LINE（FISCO）
Ex i T
POWER
TRANSMITTER
Ex d［ib］
POWER
Ex d ib
SENSOR
Ex ib
INTEGRAL MODEL SEPARATE MODEL
Fig.11.4
[Configuration of FISCO Explosion Protection]

The transmitters with FF Communication Specification and PROFIBUS Communication Specification are
connected to bus line via TB4 (I/O+, I/O -) of terminal board but the voltage applied from bus line to the
non-intrinsic safety circuit in the transmitter is separated (galvanically isolated) at FF Unit or PROFIBUS
Unit. Accordingly, please conform to the warning below in order to assure the establishment of FISCO
Explosion Protection when using FF or PROFIBUS Communication.
WARNING: Do not use analog output, pulse output and status when FF Communication
or PROFIBUS Communication is active. Do not perform wiring, either.
142
L--740--28--E
12. ABOUT MARITIME CERTIFICATION

ALTImass transmitter is approved of the maritime certification under below conditions:
Item Contents
Classification Society DNV GL
CA00A, CA001, CA003, CA006, CA010, CA015, CA025, CA040, CA050, CA080
TypeU
Unitable (CA100, CA150, CA15H, CA200, CA20H, CA250) ※1
Sensor TypeS CS010, CS015, CS025, CS040, CS050, CSR50, CS080
TypeB CB006, CB010, CB015, CB025, CB040, CB050
Temperature 　D　 (－25℃ to ＋55℃ )
Humidity 　　　B 　(Relative Humidity: less than 100%)
Vibration 　　　A 　(2 to 13.2Hz with 1mm amplitude, 13.2 to 100Hz with 0.7g acceleration)
※ Install at the place where mechanical vibration from engine,
Location Classes
compressor, pump and so on is not introduced into transmitter
directly.
EMC 　　　　　A 　(All locations except bridge and open deck)
Enclosure　　　C 　(IP56)
N O T E : ※1. Sensors in parentheses are certified only as separately mounted type.
Regarding Cable Wiring

If using ALTImass as certified equipment for maritime applications, use metal conduit tube, marine cable
(with shield), etc. for the power and signal cables and connect shielded sections to the transmitter
housing.
Be sure to use the dedicated cable for the connection between the sensor and the transmitter, and
implement waterproofing treatment which satisfies IP56.
Dedicated Cable
Power Cable
Power
Source
Receiver Signal Cable
Fig.12.1
143
L--740--28--E
13. REGARDING EHEDG CERTIFICATION

Type S (EHEDG Specifications) has been certified by European Hygienic Engineering & Design Group.
Certification Type: TYPE EL CLASSⅠ
It is recommended to refer EHEDG Document Number 8 [Design Criteria for Sanitary Equipment/ Device]
for details.
Comply strictly with your service conditions below in case of EHEDG Specifications.
(1) Mounting Orientation

・Install this equipment vertically in the line so as to Vertical Piping
enable self-drain.
・In case the electric conduit faces upward, make

sure to prepare a countermeasure to rainwater from
intruding inside.
(2) Important Point at CIP Washing

Use wash solution at flow velocity of 1.5m/s min.
(3) Process Connection and Seal

Conform to EHEDG Document.
Refer to EHEDG Position Paper “Pipe Coupling and
Process Connections”(current version). Flow Direction
Fig.13.1
144
L--740--28--E
14. PRODUCT CODE EXPLANATION

14.1 Type U
Regulations
Ex-proof temp. class Transmitter
Explosionproof Transmitter construction
Process connection Power source
Major parts material Pulse
Temp. category Communication protocol
Fluid category Version code
Meter size/Nominal Diameter
Model
Special shape designation
①②③④⑤−⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪−⑬⑭⑮−⑰⑱⑲⑳ − / / / Additional code
Main code
● Main code (CA00A to CA080) ○ : Compatible, × : Not applicable, △ : Request inquiries
① ② Model Selector Chart ⑫ —

C A ALTImass Type U ⑬ Explosionproof
Low temp. explosionproof service: CA025, CA040, CA050, CA080

③ ④ ⑤ Meter size/Nominal Diameter 0 Non-explosionproof
High temp. service: CA025, CA040, CA050

JIS Flange ASME·JPI Flange DIN Flange Ferrule Screw 1 TIIS
0 0 A R1/4 2 ATEX, IECEx
High temp. service: CA080

0 0 1 R1/4 3 KCs
0 0 3 10mm 1/2˝ DN 15 10A Rc3/8 4 CSA (C-US)
CA040, CA050
CA00A, CA001
0 0 6 10mm 1/2˝ DN 15 10A Rc3/8 5 EAC
0 1 0 15mm 1/2˝ DN 15 15A Rc3/8 7 NEPSI ※5
CA003
CA006
CA010
CA015
CA025
CA080
15mm 1/2˝ DN 15 15A Rc3/4 T ITRI
0 1 5
25mm 1˝ DN 25 ⑭ Ex-proof temp. class
25mm 1˝ DN 25 25 (ISO), IDF 1S 0 Non-explosionproof
0 2 5
40mm 1˝·1/2˝ DN 40 1 T1
0 4 0 40mm 1˝·1/2˝ DN 40 38 (ISO), IDF 1.5S 2 T2
0 5 0 50mm 2˝ DN 50 51 (ISO), IDF 2S 3T3
80mm 3˝ DN 80 76.1 (ISO), IDF 3S 4T4
0 8 0
100mm 4˝ DN 100 5T5
⑥ — ⑮ Regulations
⑦ Fluid category 0 Standard
L Liquid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ G High Pressure Gas Safety Act w/Material test certificate
(Approved product)
G Gas ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ○
High Pressure Gas Safety Act
⑧ Temp. category ※1 H (Individual test) w/Material test certificate
2 Standard (200℃ and lower) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × High Pressure Gas Safety Act
J (Completion inspection) w/Material test certificate
3 High temp. (350℃ and lower) × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ×
4Low temp. explosionproof (−200℃ to +50℃) × × × × × × × × × × ○ M Gas Business Act w/Material test certificate
⑨ Major parts material T Fire Service Act w/Material test certificate
S SUS316L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ S Ship Classification Society Pattern Approval Separately mounted only
M SUS316L+Alloy C × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ Ship Classification Society Pattern Approval + w/Material test certificate
P Separately mounted only
H Alloy C ※2 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○
C CRN (Canadian Registration Number) Pattern approval ※6
P Alloy C (High Pressure) ※3 × × × ○ ○ × × × × × ×
⑩ ⑪ Process connection K CRN (Canadian Registration Number) Pattern approval
+ w/Material test certificate ※6
J 1 JIS10K (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ F w/Material test certificate
J 2 JIS20K (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ B PED ※7
J 3 JIS30K (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ⑯ —
J 4 JIS40K (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ⑰ Transmitter
J 6 JIS63K (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 ALTImass
A 1 ASME150 (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ⑱ Transmitter construction ※8
A 3 ASME300 (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 Integrally mounted
A 6 ASME600 (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2 Separately mounted
P 1 JPI150 (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ⑲ Power source
P 3 JPI300 (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 20 to 30VDC
P 6 JPI600 (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2 85 to 264VAC (safety rating: 100 to 240VAC) 50/60Hz
D 1 DIN PN10 ※4 (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ⑳ Pulse
D B DIN PN16 ※4 (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 When "2, 3" are chosen for "Communication interface "
D 3 DIN PN25 ※4 (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ B Voltage
D 4 DIN PN40 ※4 (Standard nominal size ※9) × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ G Open drain (open collector output equivalent) (Standard)
K 1 JIS10K (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × Communication protocol
K 2 JIS20K (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × 1 HART communication (HART protocol version 7, Bell202)
K 3 JIS30K (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × 2 FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 communication (ITK version6)
B 1 ASME150 (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × 3PROFIBUS PA communication (Profile version3.02)
B 3 ASME300 (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × 4Modbus communication (RS-485 Modbus protocol)
B 6 ASME600 (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × Version code
Q 1 JPI150 (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × A Version code: A (CA003 only)
Q 3 JPI300 (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × B Version code: B
Q 6 JPI600 (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × —
E 1 DIN PN10 ※4 (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × Special shape designation
E B DIN PN16 ※4 (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × 0 Standard
E 3 DIN PN25 ※4 (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × Z Special shape (including polishing, long neck)
E 4 DIN PN40 ※4 (Expanded nominal size ※10, ※11) × × × × △ △ × ○ × × × ※9: The standard nominal size of each model is as follows.
T T Screw (Male) ○ × × × × × × × × × × Model JIS Flange ASME•JPI Flange DIN Flange
T C Screw (Female) × ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × × × × CA003 10mm 1/2″ DIN15
H S ISO Ferrule × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × CA006 10mm 1/2″ DIN15
Z 9 Special ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ CA010 15mm 1/2″ DIN15
CA015 15mm 1/2″ DIN15
※1: Explosionproof specifications are restricted depending on the temp. class.
※2: When "H" is chosen for "Major parts material ⑨ ", CA003 are always threaded connection, CA025 25mm 1″ DIN25
and CA006 to CA080 are loose flange type. CA040 40mm 1·1/2″ DIN40
※3: When "P" for high pressure is chosen as "Major parts material ⑨ ", threaded connection is always applied. CA050 50mm 2″ DIN50
※4: DIN flange is applied only when "S" and "M" are chosen for "Major parts material ⑨ ". CA080 80mm 3″ DIN80
※5: "2, 3" for "Communication protocol " are not applicable.
※6: CRN is applicable only to CSA explosionproof and ASME flange models. ※10: The expanded nominal size of each model is as follows.
※7: When selecting "B" for "Regulations ⑮ " following limitations apply:
Model JIS Flange ASME•JPI Flange DIN Flange
Code ③④⑤ are only to size 040, 050 and 080.
Code ⑨ is only to S. CA015 (Request inquiries) 25mm 1″ DIN25
Code ⑩⑪ are only to A1, A3, A6, D1, DB, D3 and D4. CA025 (Request inquiries) 40mm 1·1/2″ DIN40
※8: The maximum measurement temperature of integral type is 150℃. CA080 100mm 4″ DIN100
"High temp. and low temp. type CA00A to CA003" are only "(transmitter) separate type".
※11: Expanded nominal size is applied only when "S" and "M" are chosen for
"Major parts material ⑨ ".
145
L--740--28--E
Regulations
Model
①②③④⑤−⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪−⑬⑭⑮−⑰⑱⑲⑳ − / / / Additional code
Main code
● Main code (CA100 to CA250)

① ② Model ⑫ —
C A ALTImass Type U ⑬ Explosion-proof
Low temp. explosionproof service:
CA15H, CA200, CA20H, CA250

③ ④ ⑤ Meter size/Nominal Diameter 0 Non-explosionproof
High temp. service:

JIS Flange ASME·JPI Flange DIN Flange 1 TIIS
CA15H, CA200,
CA100, CA150,
CA20H, CA250
CA100, CA150
CA100, CA150,
1 0 0 100mm 4˝ DN 100 2 ATEX, IECEx
1 5 0 150mm 6˝ DN 150 3 KCs
1 5 H 150mm 6˝ DN 150 4 CSA (C-US)
2 0 0 200mm 8˝ DN 200 5 EAC
2 0 H 200mm 8˝ DN 200 7 NEPSI ※2
2 5 0 250mm 10˝ DN 250 T ITRI
⑥ — ⑭ Ex-proof temp. class
⑦ Fluid category 0 Non-explosionproof
L Liquid ○ ○ ○ 1 T1
⑧ Temp. category ※1 2 T2
2 Standard (200℃ and lower) ○ × × 3 T3
3 High temp. (350℃ and lower) × ○ × 4 T4
4 Low temp. explosionproof (−200℃ to +50℃) × × ○ 5 T5
⑨ Major parts material ⑮ Regulations
S SUS316L ○ ○ ○ 0 Standard
⑩ ⑪ Process connection High Pressure Gas Safety Act
G ※w/Material test certificate
J 1 JIS10K ○ ○ ○ (Approved product) CA100 and CA150 only
J 2 JIS20K ○ ○ ○ High Pressure Gas Safety Act
H ※w/Material test certificate
(Individual test)
J 3 JIS30K ○ ○ ○
A 1 ASME150 ○ ○ ○ J ※w/Material test certificate
(Completion inspection)
A 3 ASME300 ○ ○ ○ M Gas Business Act ※w/Material test certificate
A 6 ASME600 ○ ○ ○ T Fire Service Act ※w/Material test certificate
P 1 JPI150 ○ ○ ○ S Ship Classification Society Pattern Approval
P 3 JPI300 ○ ○ ○ Ship Classification Society Pattern Approval
P
P 6 JPI600 ○ ○ ○ + w/Material test certificate
D 1 DIN PN10 ○ ○ ○ C CRN (Canadian Registration Number) Pattern approval ※3
D B DIN PN16 ○ ○ ○ CRN (Canadian Registration Number) Pattern approval
K
+ w/Material test certificate ※3
D 3 DIN PN25 ○ ○ ○
F w/Material test certificate
D 4 DIN PN40 ○ ○ ○
B PED ※4
Z 9 Special ○ ○ ○
⑯ —
※1: Explosionproof specifications are restricted depending on the temp. class.
⑰ Transmitter
※2: "2, 3" for "Communication protocol " are not applicable.
※3: CRN is applicable only to CSA explosionproof and ASME flange models. 1 ALTImass
※4: When selecting "B" for "Regulations ⑮ " following limitations apply: ⑱ Transmitter construction ※5
Code ⑩⑪ are only to A1, A3, A6, D1, DB, D3 and D4. 1 Integrally mounted
※5: When selecting explosionproof other than TIIS with fluid temperature exceeding 80℃, only "(transmitter) 2 Separately mounted
separate type" is applicable.
⑲ Power source
"High temp. and low temp. type" can only be "(transmitter) separate type".
1 20 to 30VDC
2 85 to 264VAC (safety rating: 100 to 240VAC) 50/60Hz
⑳ Pulse
0 When "2, 3" are chosen for "Communication interface "
B Voltage
G Open drain (open collector output equivalent) (Standard)
Communication protocol
1 HART communication (HART protocol version 7, Bell202)
2 FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 communication (ITK version6)
3 PROFIBUS PA communication (Profile version3.02)
4 Modbus communication (RS-485 Modbus protocol)
Version code
B Version code: B
—
0 Standard
Z Special shape
146
L--740--28--E
Regulations
Model
①②③④⑤−⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪−⑬⑭⑮−⑰⑱⑲⑳ − / / / Additional code
Main code
● Additional code
Category of High Pressure Gas Document
H P 0 Other than High Pressure Gas D S J DWG and specifications for approval (Japanese)
H P 1 Toxic gas and flammable gas D S E DWG and specifications for approval (English)
H P 2 Toxic gas D R 0 Re-submission of DWG with specifications
H P 3 Flammable gas D C J Final DWG (Japanese)
H P 4 Other than toxic or flammable gas D C E Final DWG (English)
Density calibration D P J Calculation sheet (Japanese)
M 0 0 Density calibration D P E Calculation sheet (English)
Special test (instrumental error) S E J Instrumental error test report (Japanese)
A 1 0 Taxed custody transfer S E E Instrumental error test report (English)
A 2 0 By certified measurer S T J Pressure test report (Japanese)
A 9 9 Designation of instrumental error test method Addition of one (1) test point, etc. S T E Pressure test report (English)
Flow direction S A J Airtight test report (Japanese)
F L 0 L→R S A E Airtight test report (English)
F R 0 R→L D D J Dimensional check record (Japanese)
F D 0 B → T Electric conduit at the bottom D D E Dimensional check record (English)
Designated special paint on body Penetrant test report
S P J Welded part of pressure resistant vessel
B X 0 Customer designation (Japanese)
Designated special paint on transmmiter Penetrant test report
S P E Welded part of pressure resistant vessel
S F 0 Corrosion proof Special treatment (English)
S D 0 Salinity tolerance Radiographic inspection
S R J Welded part of pressure resistant vessel
S E 0 Acid tolerance Special treatment (Japanese)
S X 0 Customer designated paint Special treatment Radiographic inspection
S R E Welded part of pressure resistant vessel
Cleansing (English)
T W 0 Non-oil and non-water treatment S X J PMI test report (Japanese)
T F 0 Food cleansing S X E PMI test report (English)
S S J Impact test report (Japanese) Manifold only
S S E Impact test report (English) Manifold only
D Y J WPS/PQR (Japanese)
D Y E WPS/PQR (English)
D 9 J Photo (Japanese)
D 9 E Photo (English)
D T J Inspection procedure (Japanese)
D T E Inspection procedure (English)
C A J Inspection certificate: A set Only Japanese
C B J Inspection certificate: B set Only Japanese
C C J Inspection certificate: C set Only Japanese
C D J Inspection certificate: D set Only Japanese
Witnessed by customer
V 1 0 Required
147
L--740--28--E
14.2 Type S
14.2.1 Stainless steel tube type
Ex-proof temp. class Regulations

Explosion-proof Transmitter
Process connection Transmitter construction
Major parts material Power source
Temp. category Pulse
Density range Communication interface
Meter size/Nominal Diameter Version code
Model Special shape designation
①②③④⑤−⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪−⑬⑭⑮−⑰⑱⑲⑳ − / / / Additional code
Main code
● Main code
① ② Model ⑮ Regulations
C S ALTImass Type S 0 Standard
③ ④ ⑤ Meter size/Nominal Diameter High Pressure Gas Safety Act
G ※3 ※w/Material test certificate
(Approved product)
JIS flange ASME•JPI flange Ferrule
High Pressure Gas Safety Act ※w/Material test certificate
0 1 0 15mm 1/2″ 15A H ※3
(Individual test) (Designed on PO issued)
0 1 5 15mm 1/2″ 15A High Pressure Gas Safety Act
J ※3 ※w/Material test certificate
0 2 5 25mm 1″ 38 (ISO), IDF 1.5S
T Fire Service Act ※w/Material test certificate
0 4 0 40mm 1·1/2″ 51 (ISO), IDF 2S
S Ship Classification Society Pattern Approval
0 5 0 50mm 2″ 63.5 (ISO), IDF 2.5S
P Ship Classification Society Pattern Approval + w/Material test certificate
0 8 0 80mm 3″ ※Consult with OVAL
F w/Material test certificate
⑥ —
⑯ —
⑦ Density range
⑰ Transmitter
1 Low density liquids (0.5 to 1.0g/mL)
1 ALTImass
2 Ordinary density liquid (0.7 to 1.3g/mL)
⑱ Transmitter construction ※4
3 High density liquid (1.0 to1.5g/mL)
1 Integrally mounted
⑧ Temp. category ※1
2 Separately mounted
1 Standard (130℃ and lower)
⑲ Power source
⑨ Major parts material
1 20 to 30VDC
S SUS316L
2 85 to 264VAC (Safety rated 100 to 240VAC 50/60Hz)
⑩ ⑪ Process connection
⑳ Pulse output type
J 1 JIS10K
0 When "2, 3" are chosen for "Communication interface "
J 2 JIS20K
B Voltage pulse
A 1 ASME150
G Open drain pulse (equivalent to open collector pulse) (standard)
P 1 JPI150
Communication interface
H S ISO Ferrule
1 HART communication (HART protocol version 7, Bell202)
Z 9 Special
2 FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1communication (ITK version6)
⑫ —
3 PROFIBUS PA communication (Profile version3.02)
⑬ Explosion-proof
4 Modbus communication (RS-485 Modbus protocol)
0 Non-explosionproof
Version code
1 TIIS ※2
A Version code: A
2 ATEX/IECEx
—
3 KOSHA/KTL ※2
4 CSA (C-US) ※2
0 Standard
5 EAC ※2
Z Special shape (including polishing)
7 NEPSI ※2
⑭ Ex-proof temp. class
3 T3
4 T4
※1: Explosionproof specifications are restricted based on temperature class.
※2: "2, 3" for "Communication interface " are in preparation and is not available yet.
※3: CS080 is not conform to (the Japan) High Pressure Gas Act.
※4: If temperature of the fluid exceeds 80℃ for explosionproof types, only "Separately mounted" type is available for the transmitter construction.
In case of non-explosionproof, integral type can be used up to 130℃ by restricting the transmitter ambient temp. to 45℃ at max.
148
L--740--28--E

Density range Communication interface
①②③④⑤−⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪−⑬⑭⑮−⑰⑱⑲⑳ − / / / Additional code
Main code
● Additional code
Special test (instrumental error) D P J Calculation sheet (Japanese)
A 2 0 By certified measurer D P E Calculation sheet (English)
A 9 9 Designation of instrumental error test method Addition of one (1) test point, etc. S E J Instrumental error test report (Japanese)
Flow direction S E E Instrumental error test report (English)
F L 0 L→R S T J Pressure test report (Japanese)
F R 0 R→L S T E Pressure test report (English)
F D 0 B → T Electric conduit at the bottom S A J Airtight test report (Japanese)
Designated special paint on body S A E Airtight test report (English)
B X 0 Customer designation D D J Dimensional check record (Japanese)
Designated special paint on transmmiter D D E Dimensional check record (English)
S F 0 Corrosion proof Special treatment Penetrant test report
S D 0 Salinity tolerance (Japanese)
S E 0 Acid tolerance Special treatment Penetrant test report
S X 0 Customer designated paint Special treatment (English)
Cleansing Radiographic inspection
T W 0 Non-oil and non-water treatment (Japanese)
T F 0 Food cleansing Radiographic inspection
(English)
S X J PMI test report (Japanese)
S X E PMI test report (English)
Withessed by customer
V 1 0 Required
149
L--740--28--E
14.2.2 Titanium tube type

Density range Communication protocol
①②③④⑤−⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪−⑬⑭⑮−⑰⑱⑲⑳ − / / / Additional code
Main code
● Main code
① ② Model ⑭ Ex-proof temp. class
C S ALTImass Type S 0 Non-explosionproof
③ ④ ⑤ Meter size/Nominal Diameter 3 T3
JIS flange ASME•JPI flange Ferrule 4 T4
0 1 0 10mm 1/2″ 10A ⑮ Regulations
0 1 5 15mm 1/2″ 15A 0 Standard
0 2 5 25mm 1″ 38 (ISO), IDF 1.5S E EHEDG (CS025, CS040, CS050) + w/Material test certificate
0 4 0 40mm 1·1/2″ 51 (ISO), IDF 2S T Fire Service Act ※w/Material test certificate
0 5 0 50mm 2″ 63.5 (ISO), IDF 2.5S S Ship Classification Society Pattern Approval
R 5 0 80mm 3″ 88.9 (ISO), IDF 3.5S P Ship Classification Society Pattern Approval + w/Material test certificate
⑥ — F w/Material test certificate
⑦ Density range ⑯ —
1 Low density liquids (0.5 to 1.0g/mL) ⑰ Transmitter
2 Ordinary density (0.7 to 1.3g/mL) 1 ALTImass
3 High density liquid (1.0 to 1.5g/mL) ⑱ Transmitter construction ※5
⑧ Temp. category ※1 1 Integrally mounted
1 Standard (130℃ and lower) 2 Separately mounted
⑨ Major parts material ⑲ Power source
T SB338 Grade-9 + TB480H ※2 1 20 to 30VDC
⑩ ⑪ Process connection 2 85 to 264VAC (Safety rated 100 to 240VAC 50/60Hz)
J 1 JIS10K ⑳ Pulse
J 2 JIS20K 0 When "2, 3" are chosen for "Communication interface "
A 1 ASME150 B Voltage pulse
P 1 JPI150 G Open drain pulse (equivalent to open collector pulse) (standard)
H S ISO Ferrule Communication interface
Z 9 Special 1 HART communication (HART protocol version 7, Bell202)
⑫ — 2 FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1communication (ITK version6)
⑬ Explosion-proof ※3 3 PROFIBUS PA communication (Profile version3.02)
0 Non-explosionproof 4 Modbus communication (RS-485 Modbus protocol)
1 TIIS Version code
2 ATEX/IECEx A Version code: A
3 KCs ※4 —
4 CSA (C-US) Special shape designation
5 EAC ※4 0 Standard
7 NEPSI ※4 Z Special shape (including polishing, long neck)
※2: If it is necessary to use the existing transmitter, consult OVAL.
※3: For CSR50, applicable explosionproof specifications are TIIS, ATEX, and IECEx only.
150
L--740--28--E

Density range Communication protocol
①②③④⑤−⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪−⑬⑭⑮−⑰⑱⑲⑳ − / / / Additional code
Main code
● Additional code
Density calibration Document
M 0 0 Density calibration D S J DWG and specifications for approval (Japanese)
Special test (instrumental error) D S E DWG and specifications for approval (English)
A 2 0 By certified measurer D R 0 Re-submission of DWG with specifications
A 9 9 Designation of instrumental error test method Addition of one (1) test point, etc. D C J Final DWG (Japanese)
Flow direction D C E Final DWG (English)
F L 0 L→R D P J Calculation sheet (Japanese)
F R 0 R→L D P E Calculation sheet (English)
F D 0 B → T Electric conduit at the bottom S E J Instrumental error test report (Japanese)
Designated special paint on body S E E Instrumental error test report (English)
B X 0 Customer designation S T J Pressure test report (Japanese)
Designated special paint on transmmiter S T E Pressure test report (English)
S F 0 Corrosion proof Special treatment S A J Airtight test report (Japanese)
S D 0 Salinity tolerance S A E Airtight test report (English)
S E 0 Acid tolerance Special treatment D D J Dimensional check record (Japanese)
S X 0 Customer designated paint Special treatment D D E Dimensional check record (English)
Cleansing Penetrant test report
T W 0 Non-oil and non-water treatment (Japanese)
T F 0 Food cleansing Penetrant test report
(English)
Radiographic inspection
(Japanese)
Radiographic inspection
(English)
S X J PMI test report (Japanese)
V 1 0 Required
151
L--740--28--E
14.3 Type B
Fluid category Communication protocol
①②③④⑤−⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪−⑬⑭⑮−⑰⑱⑲⑳ − / / / Additional code
Main code
● Main code
① ② Model ⑮ Regulations
C B ALTImass Type B 0 Standard
③ ④ ⑤ Meter size/Nominal Diameter High Pressure Gas Safety Act ※w/Material test certificate
H
(Individual test) (Designed on PO issued)
JIS flange ASME•JPI flange Ferrule
0 0 6 10mm 1/2″ 10A J ※w/Material test certificate
0 1 0 15mm 1/2″ 15A T Fire Service Act ※w/Material test certificate
0 1 5 15mm 1/2″ 15A S Ship Classification Society Pattern Approval
0 2 5 25mm 1″ 25 (ISO), IDF 1S P Ship Classification Society Pattern Approval + w/Material test certificate
0 4 0 40mm 1·1/2″ 38 (ISO), IDF 1.5S C CRN (Canadian Registration Number) Pattern approval ※3
0 5 0 50mm 2″ 51 (ISO), IDF 2S K CRN (Canadian Registration Number) Pattern approval+w/Material test certificate ※3
⑥ — F w/Material test certificate
⑦ Fluid category ⑯ —
L Liquid ⑰ Transmitter
⑧ Temp. category ※1 1 ALTImass
1 Standard (130℃ and lower) ⑱ Transmitter construction ※4
⑨ Major parts material 1 Integrally mounted
S SUS316L 2 Separately mounted
⑩ ⑪ Process connection ⑲ Power source
J 1 JIS10K 1 20 to 30VDC
J 2 JIS20K 2 85 to 264VAC (Safety rated 100 to 240VAC 50/60Hz)
J 3 JIS30K ⑳ Pulse
A 1 ASME150 0 When "2, 3" are chosen for "Communication interface "
A 3 ASME300 B Voltage pulse
A 6 ASME600 G Open drain pulse (equivalent to open collector pulse) (standard)
P 1 JPI150 Communication interface
P 3 JPI300 1 HART communication (HART protocol version 7, Bell202)
P 6 JPI600 2 FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1communication (ITK version6)
H S ISO Ferrule 3 PROFIBUS PA communication (Profile version3.02)
Z 9 Special 4 Modbus communication (RS-485 Modbus protocol)
⑫ — Version code
⑬ Explosion-proof B Version code: B
0 Non-explosionproof —
1 TIIS ※2 Special shape designation
2 ATEX/IECEx 0 Standard
3 KOSHA/KTL ※2 Z Special shape
4 CSA (C-US) ※2
5 EAC ※2
7 NEPSI ※2
⑭ Ex-proof temp. class
3 T3
4 T4
※3: CRN is applicable only to CSA explosionproof and ASME flange models.
152
L--740--28--E

Fluid category Communication protocol
①②③④⑤−⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪−⑬⑭⑮−⑰⑱⑲⑳ − / / / Additional code
Main code
● Additional code
Density calibration D P J Calculation sheet (Japanese)
M 0 0 Density calibration D P E Calculation sheet (English)
Special test (instrumental error) S E J Instrumental error test report (Japanese)
A 2 0 By certified measurer S E E Instrumental error test report (English)
A 9 9 Designation of instrumental error test method Addition of one (1) test point, etc. S T J Pressure test report (Japanese)
Flow direction S T E Pressure test report (English)
F L 0 L→R S A J Airtight test report (Japanese)
F R 0 R→L S A E Airtight test report (English)
F D 0 B → T Electric conduit at the bottom D D J Dimensional check record (Japanese)
Designated special paint on body D D E Dimensional check record (English)
B X 0 Customer designation Penetrant test report
Designated special paint on transmmiter (Japanese)
S F 0 Corrosion proof Special treatment Penetrant test report
S D 0 Salinity tolerance (English)
S E 0 Acid tolerance Special treatment Radiographic inspection
S X 0 Customer designated paint Special treatment (Japanese)
Cleansing Radiographic inspection
T W 0 Non-oil and non-water treatment (English)
T F 0 Food cleansing S X J PMI test report (Japanese)
S S J Impact test report (Japanese)
S S E Impact test report (English)
V 1 0 Required
153
L--740--28--E
15. PRODUCT CODE EXPLANATION OF THE OLD PRODUCT CODE

15.1 Type U product codes
15.1.1 CA00A to CA080
Product Code
Item Description Selector Chart
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱
Model C A ALTImass Type U
CA025, CA040, CA050, CA080
High temp. service: CA080 (below 350℃)

High temp. service: CA025, CA040, CA050 (below 350℃)
Low temp. explosionproof service: CA025, CA040, CA050, CA080

0 0 A 1/4˝ connection
CA00A, CA001
CA010, CA015
0 0 1 1/4˝ connection
0 0 3 10mm connection (3/8˝)
10mm connection (3/8˝)
CA003
CA006
0 0 6
Nominal 0 1 0 15mm connection (1/2˝)
size 0 1 5 15mm connection (1/2˝)
0 2 5 25mm connection (1˝)
0 4 0 40mm connection (1･1/2˝)
L Liquid service ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Fluid category Gas service
G ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ○
1 Standard (below 130° C) × × ○ ○ ○ × × ×
2 Standard (below 200° C) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ×
Temp. category (※1) High temperature service (below 350° C)
3 × × × × × ○ ○ ×
4 Low temperature explosionproof service (－200° C to ＋50℃) × × × × ○ × × ○
1 Standard ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pressure category High pressure service (※2)
2 × × × ○ × × × ×
S SUS316L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M SUS316L ＋ Alloy C × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○
Major parts material Alloy C (※3)
H × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○
X Other material ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
A Screw-in ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × ×
B Ferrule × ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ×
C JIS 10K × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D JIS 20K × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
E JIS 30K × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
F JIS 40K × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
G JIS 63K × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
H ASME 150 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
J ASME 300 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Process connection
K ASME 600 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L JPI 150 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M JPI 300 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
N JPI 600 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
P DIN PN 10 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Q DIN PN 16 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
R DIN PN 25 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
S DIN PN 40 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Z Other than above × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 Integrally mounted × × ○ ○ ○ × × ×
Transmitter construction (※4) Separately mounted
2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 20 to 30VDC
Power source
2 85 to 264VAC (Safety rated 100 to 240VAC), 50/60Hz
A Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Mass flow
B Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Density
C Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Temperature
D Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Volume flow (true density)
E Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Volume flow (fixed density)
Analog output (※5, 6, 7) F Output 1: Density Output 2: Temperature
G Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2: Dens (true density)
H Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2: Density
J Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2: temperature
K Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2: Temperature
X Non-output In the case of FOUNDATION fieldbus,PROFIBUS communication
A Output 1: Mass flow
B Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Single pulse
C Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density)
D Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Mass flow
E Output 1: Mass flow Output2: Volume flow (true density)
Pulse output (※5, 6, 7) F Output 1: Mass flow Output2: Volume flow (fixed density)
G Output 1: Vol. flow (true dens.) Output 2: Vol. flow (true dens.) Double pulse
H Output 1: Vol. flow (fixed dens.) Output 2: Vol. flow (fixed dens.)
J Output 1: Volume flow (true dens.) Output 2: Mass flow
K Output 1: Volume flow (fixed dens.) Output 2: Mass flow
0 Non-output In the case of FOUNDATION fieldbus,PROFIBUS communication
Pulse output type (※5) 1 Open drain pulse (standard)
2 Voltage pulse
1 HART communication HART protocol version7、Bell202
2 FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 communication (※5) ITK version6
Communication interface PROFIBUS PA communication (※5) Profile version3.02
3
4 Modbus communication RS-485 Modbus protocol
1 TIIS
2 ATEX, IECEx
Explosionproof rating 3 KOSHA/KTL (※8)
4 CSA
5 GOST (※8)
7 NEPSI (※8)
Sensor unit: Temp. class T1, separate transmitter only,
1 CA025 to CA080 (high temp. service model) only
Explosionproof temperature class 2 Sensor unit: Temp. class T2, separate tr. only, CA003 to CA080 only
3 Sensor unit: Temp. class T3, separate transmitter only
4 Sensor unit: Temp. class T4
5 Sensor unit: Temp. class T5, (－200℃ to +50℃),CA025 to CA080 (Low temp. explosionproof service) only
NOTES ※1：Explosionproof specification has restrictions on temperature class.

※2：If "High pressure service" is selected for the pressure category, process connection will be "Screw-in".
※3：When "H" (Alloy C) is selected as major part material code, only loose flange is applicable for CA006.
※4：If temperature of the fluid exceeds 80℃, only "Separately mounted" type is available for the transmitter construction.
※5：When FOUNDATION fieldbus, PROFIBUS is selected for communication interface,
　　　product code categories of analog output is "X" and pulse output is "X" (pulse output type:"0").
※6：When "Volume flow (fixed density)" is selected for analog output or pulse output, fixed density will be applied.
※7：Simultaneous output of both "Volume flow (fixed density)" and "Volume flow (true density)" for analog output and pulse
output is not available.
※8：Communication interfaces "FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 communication" and "PROFIBUS PA communication" are
unavailable. (in preparation)
※: The new product code has been implemented since April 2017.
Therefore, the product code explanation of the old product code will not be updated after April 2017.
Contact OVAL for any inquiries about the old product code.
154
L--740--28--E
15.1.2 CA100 to CA250

Product Code
Item ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱ Description Selector Chart
Model C A ALTImass Type U
CA15H, CA200, CA20H, CA250
CA100, CA150 (below 350℃)
CA100,CA150,CA15H,CA200,CA20H,CA250
Low temp. explosionproof service:

High temp. service:
CA100, CA150
Nominal 1 5 H 150mm connection (6˝)
size 2 0 0 200mm connection (8˝)
2 0 H 200mm connection (8˝)
Fluid category L Liquid service ○ ○ ○
2 Standard (below 200° C) ○ × ×
3 High temperature service (below 350° C) × ○ ×
4 Low temperature explosionproof service (－200° C to ＋50℃) × × ○
Pressure category 1 Standard ○ ○ ○
Major parts material S SUS316L ○ ○ ○
C JIS 10K ○ ○ ○
D JIS 20K ○ ○ ○
E JIS 30K ○ ○ ○
H ASME 150 ○ ○ ○
J ASME 300 ○ ○ ○
K ASME 600 ○ ○ ○
L JPI 150 ○ ○ ○
Process connection
M JPI 300 ○ ○ ○
N JPI 600 ○ ○ ○
P DIN PN 10 ○ ○ ○
Q DIN PN 16 ○ ○ ○
R DIN PN 25 ○ ○ ○
S DIN PN 40 ○ ○ ○
Z Other than above ○ ○ ○
1 Integrally mounted ○ × ×
Transmitter construction (※2)
2 Separately mounted ○ ○ ○
1 20 to 30VDC
Power source
B Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Density
D Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Volume flow (true density)
Analog output (※3, 4, 5) F Output 1: Density Output 2: Temperature
G Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2: Dens (true density)
H Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2: Density
J Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2: temperature
E Output 1: Mass flow Output2: Volume flow (true density)
Pulse output (※3, 4, 5) F Output 1: Mass flow Output2: Volume flow (fixed density)
G Output 1: Vol. flow (true dens.) Output 2: Vol. flow (true dens.) Double pulse
J Output 1: Volume flow (true dens.) Output 2: Mass flow
K Output 1: Volume flow (fixed dens.) Output 2: Mass flow
2 Voltage pulse
3 PROFIBUS PA communication (※3) Profile version3.02
1 TIIS
2 ATEX, IECEx
4 CSA (※6, 7)
5 GOST
7 NEPSI (※6, 7) In preparation
Sensor unit: Temp. class T1, separate transmitter only,
1 CA100 to CA150 (high temp. service model) only
Explosionproof temperature class 2 Sensor unit: Temp. class T2， separate transmitter only
3 Sensor unit: Temp. class T3, separate transmitter only
5 Sensor unit: Temp. class T5, (－200℃ to +50℃), Low temp. explosionproof service only

※7：Models CA15H through CA250 are unavailable. (in preparation)
155
L--740--28--E
15.2 Type S product codes

Product Code
Item Description
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱
Model C S ALTImass Type S
0 1 0 15mm connection (1/2") (※5)
0 1 5 15mm connection (1/2")
0 2 5 25mm connection (1")
Nominal size 0 4 0 40mm connection (1･1/2")
R 5 0 80mm connection (3") Titanium Tube Type only
0 8 0 80mm connection (3") Stainless Steel Tube Type only
H High density liquid (1.0 to1.5g/ml)
Fluid category M Ordinary density liquid (0.7 to 1.3g/ml)
L Low density liquids (0.5 to 1.0g/ml)
Temp. category (※1) 1 Standard (below 130° C)
Pressure category 1 Standard
S SUS316L (except for CSR50) Stainless Steel Tube Type only
Major parts material (※9)
T SB338 Grade-9＋TB480H (except for CS080) Titanium Tube Type only
B Ferrule
C JIS 10K
D JIS 20K
Process connection
H ASME 150
L JPI 150
Z Other than above
1 20 to 30VDC
Power source
B Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Density（※6）
D Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Volume flow (true density)（※6）
Analog output (※3, 4) F Output 1: Density Output 2: Temperature（※6）
G Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2: Density（※6）
H Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2: Density（※6）
J Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2: Temperature（※6）
B Output 1: Volume flow (true density )（※6） Single pulse
E Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Volume flow (true dens.)（※6）
Pulse output (※3, 4) F Output 1: Mass flow Output 2: Volume flow (fixed density)
G Output 1: Vol. flow (true dens.) Output 2: Vol. flow (true dens.)（※6） Double pulse
J Output 1: Volume flow (true dens.) Output 2: Mass flow（※6）
K Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2: Mass flow
2 Voltage pulse
1 HART communication Bell202
1 TIIS
2 ATEX, IECEx
Explosionproof rating (※8) 3 KOSHA/KTL (※7)
4 CSA
5 GOST (※7)
7 NEPSI (※7)
Explosionproof temperature class 3 Sensor unit: Temp. class T3, separate transmitter only
※5：JIS connection is 10mm for the titanium tube type.
※6：Available only for the titanium tube type.
　　　　　　※8：Applicable explosionproof rating for CSR50 are TIIS, ATEX, and IECEx only.
　　　　　　※9：If the major parts material ⑨ is "T", your existing transmitter may not be compatible. If you plan to use the existing
transmitter, contact OVAL.
156
L--740--28--E
15.3 Type B product codes

Product Code
Item Description
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱
Model C B ALTImass Type B
Nominal size
0 4 0 40mm connection (1･1/2")
Fluid category L Liquid service
Temp. category (※1) 1 Standard (below 125° C)
Pressure category 1 Standard
Major parts material S SUS316L
B Ferrule
C JIS 10K
D JIS 20K
E JIS 30K
H ASME 150
Process connection J ASME 300
K ASME 600
T ASME 900
L JPI 150
M JPI 300
Z Other than above
1 20 to 30VDC
Power source
A Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Mass flow
B Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Density
C Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Temperature
D Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Volume flow (true density)
E Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Volume flow (fixed density)
Analog output (※3, 4, 5) F Output 1: Density Output 2 : Temperature
G Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2 : Density (true density)
H Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2 : Density
J Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2 : Temperature
K Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2 : Temperature
D Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Mass flow
E Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Volume flow (true density)
Pulse output (※3, 4, 5) F Output 1: Mass flow Output 2 : Volume flow (fixed density)
G Output 1: Vol. flow (true dens.) Output 2 : Vol. flow (true dens.) Double pulse
H Output 1: Vol. flow (fixed dens.) Output 2 : Vol. flow (fixed dens.)
J Output 1: Volume flow (true density) Output 2 : Mass flow
K Output 1: Volume flow (fixed density) Output 2 : Mass flow
Pulse output type (※3, 4, 5) 1 Open drain pulse (standard)
2 Voltage pulse
1 TIIS
2 ATEX, IECEx
4 CSA (※6)
5 GOST (※6)
7 NEPSI (※6)
Explosionproof temperature class 3 Sensor unit: Temp. class T3, separate transmitter only
157
L--740--28--E
■ Shipping Parameters
Given below is the explanation of parameters found in the parameter list attached to the product.
No. Item Description Factory setting Setting

Device information
1 Tag Tag number (8-character)
2 Long Tag Tag number (32-character)
3 Descriptor Description
4 Message Message
5 Date Date of manufacture
6 Dev ID Device ID
7 Final asmbly num Final assembly number
8 Snsr s/n Sensor serial number
9 Snsr model Sensor model
10 Flange Flange rating
11 Snsr matl Sensor material
12 Hardware rev Hardware revision
Sensor type
13 Sensor type Sensor type
14 Mass flow USL Mass flow max. allowable range
15 Mass flow LSL Mass flow min. allowable range
16 Temperature USL Temperature max. allowable range
17 Temperature LSL Temperature min. allowable range
18 Vol flow USL Volume flow max. allowable range
19 Vol flow LSL Volume flow min. allowable range
20 Density USL Density max. allowable range
21 Density LSL Density min. allowable range
Flow
22 Mass flow unit Instantaneous mass flow unit
23 Vol flow unit Instantaneous volume flow unit
24 Flow direction Flow direction setting
25 Flow damp (Mass) Flow (Mass) damping
26 Flow cutoff Flow (Mass) cutoff
27 Vol flow coef Volume flow correction coefficient
Density
28 Unit Density unit
29 Damp Density damping
30 Slug low limit Lower density limit of gas multiphase flow detection
31 Slug high limit Upper density limit of gas multiphase flow detection
32 Slug duration Time duration of gas multiphase flow detection
33 Compensation Standard temp. compensation setting
34 Standard temp Standard temperature
35 Expansion coef Expansion coefficient
36 Settied density Fixed density compensation setting
37 Density Value Fixed density value
Temperature
38 Unit Temperature unit
39 Damp Temperature damping
Analog output 1
40 Assign Analog output 1 assignment
41 URV Analog output 1 setting at 20mA
42 LRV Analog output 1 setting at 4mA
43 Lowcut Analog output 1 low-cut
44 Added damp Analog output 1 added damping
Analog output 2
45 Assign Analog output 2 assignment
46 URV Analog output 2 setting at 20mA
47 LRV Analog output 2 setting at 4mA
48 Lowcut Analog output 2 low-cut
49 Added damp Analog output 2 added damping
Continued on next page➡
158
L--740--28--E
No. Item Description Factory setting Setting

Pulse output 1
50 Assign Pulse output 1 assignment
51 Freq factor Pulse output 1 full scale frequency
52 Rate factor Pulse output 1 full scale flow rate
53 Lowcut Pulse output 1 low cut
Pulse output 2
54 Assign Pulse output 2 assignment
55 Double pulse mode Double pulse output 2 assignment
56 Freq factor Pulse output 2 full scale frequency
57 Rate factor Pulse output 2 full scale flow rate
58 Lowcut Pulse output 2 low cut
Status input/output
59 Input function Status input function selection
60 Input mode Status input mode selection
61 Output function Status output function selection
62 Drive out point Drive output voltage threshold
63 Output mode Status output mode selection
H/L alarm
64 H/L alarm assign H/L alarm assignment
65 H/L alarm type H/L alarm type selection
66 High alarm point High alarm point
67 Low alarm point Low alarm point
68 H/L alarm hys H/L alarm hysteresis value
Error select
69 Sensor failure
70 Transmitter failure
71 Calibration failure
72 Saturated alarm
73 Parameter failure Output selection for each item
74 Transmitter alarm
75 Slug flow alarm
76 Calibration in progress
77 Fixed output
Error output
78 Analog Analog output pattern on errors
79 Pulse Pulse output pattern on errors
Flow cal
80 SK20 Meter factor of flow rate
81 SKM Meter error correction item
82 SKt Flow correction coefficient (Skt)
83 Cal temp Flow calibration temperature
84 Cal temp (Outer) Flow calibration temperature
85 Cal freq Flow calibration frequency
86 SKdt Flow correction coefficient (Skdt)
87 SKfa Flow correction coefficient (Skfa)
88 SKfb Flow correction coefficient (Skfb)
89 FKt Flow correction coefficient (Fkt)
90 FKdt Flow correction coefficient (Fkdt)
Zero factor
91 Snsr zero value Sensor zero adjusting value
159
L--740--28--E
SAFETY STATEMENT ON RETURNED GOODS

When you return your Coriolis flowmeter for repair or other processing, send us a fax of this Safety
Statement and, at the same time, attach it to the equipment to be returned as we need to provide a safe
working environment for our employees.
Unless the Safety Statement on Returned Goods is attached to the returned equipment, or if we find it
difficult to ensure safety, we may decline, at our discretion, to accept and process the returned equipment.
(In case some residual metered fluid may be present in the housing, consult the factory.)
Oval Coriolis Flowmeter ALTImass
Model
Serial No.
List all chemicals and process fluids in contact with the equipment.
Process Fluid Names
If an SDS is available, attach here.

Health and Safety
Hazards
If an SDS is available, attach here.

Precautions
(First aid)
NOTE: SDS stands for Safety Data Sheet. It informs us of the physical and chemical
properties of materials and how to handle them
I hereby certify that the equipment being returned has been cleaned and decontaminated in accordance
with good industrial practices. This equipment poses no health or safety risks due to contamination.
Date:
Company Name
Address
Phone No. Fax No.
Job Title
Signature by
Reason for return
Remarks
160
L--740--28--E
REPAIR REQUEST SHEET

Company name
Address
Contact
Return (shipping)
Reason for return □ Repair　　　　□ Calibration 　　□ Replacement　　　　□ Return

(type of order) □ Others
Date of
Delivery date
installation
Date of failure
Descriptions of
nonconformance (failure)
◆ Unless the statements below are fully documented, returned equipment will not be processed.
Model
Serial No.
Fluid name
Fluid density
Fluid temperature
Line pressure
Specification modification □ Yes □ No
Full scale flowrate
Pulse output ① □ Mass　□ Volume (fixed) 　 □ Volume 　 □ Pulse unit: □ O.C. □ Voltage
Pulse output ② □ Mass　□ Volume (fixed) 　 □ Volume 　 □ Pulse unit:
Analog output ① □ Mass　□ Volume (fixed) 　□ Temperature 　□ Density to
Analog output ② □ Mass　□ Volume (fixed) 　□ Temperature 　□ Density to
□ Tubes empty (no obstacles)
Sensor conditions □ Sensor empty (no obstacles)
□ Tubes clogged / contaminated
Type of cleaning material used for sensor unit
◆IMPORTANT
If sensor tubes leak, make sure that no process fluids remain in the housing. To provide a safe working
environment for our employees and engineers, this form must be filled in completely and accurately.
Unless accurate and precise information about the process fluids is given, returned equipment will NOT
be processed. Include your instructions and conditions accurately and in detail.
NOTE: To avoid misunderstanding, completely fill in this form.
161
L--740--28--E
2018.03 Revised
2009.08 Released
All specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement. L-740-28-E (1)

Flujometro Coriolis Tipo U V2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Flujometro Coriolis Tipo U V2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ins. No.

Type U Type S Type B

Type U Type U Type U Separately mounted

6.8 A Boss for Pressure Relief Device - Its Use ....................................................................... 52

9.14.4 Drive output alarm (Used for maintenance purpose)................................................... 106

1. BEFORE YOU BIGIN

1.1 Confirming the Tag Information

● Information stated on the product tag

1.2 Transportation Guidelines

1.3 Storage Guidelines

1.4 Precautions for Operating Conditions

1.5 Precautions for Installation Location

1.6 Precautions for power-on

1.7 Returning Equipment

2. GENERAL AND FEATURES

3. SPECIFICATIONS AND PERFORMANCE

● High pressure service models (CA010 and CA015)

NOTES ※1: If the viscosity is 10000mPa·s or more, contact OVAL.

● Low temperature explosionproof service models (CA025 to CA250)

● High temperature service models (CA025 to CA080)

Heat Tracer Specifications (CA025 to CA080 Option)

● High temperature service models (CA100, CA150)

Tube withstands (at 20℃) 13.5MPa

NOTES ※1: Max. ambient temperature of the sensor unit is 50℃.

3.1.2 Type S sensor unit general specifications

● Titanium tube type (CS010 to CSR50)

3.1.4 Transmitter general specifications

3.1.5 Max. operating temperature of PED specification

3.2 General Performance

3.2.1 Type U general performance

● High pressure service models (CA010 and CA015)

NOTE: The general performance is based on factory calibration accuracy.

● High temperature service models (CA025 to CA080)

NOTE: The general performance is based on factory calibration accuracy.

● High temperature service models (CA100, CA150)

NOTE: The general performance is based on factory calibration accuracy.

3.2.2 Type S general performance

NOTE: The general performance is based on factory calibration accuracy.

● Titanium tube type (CS010 to CSR50)

NOTES ※1：Density range varies with the fluid used.

3.2.3 Type B general performance

NOTE: The general performance is based on factory calibration accuracy.

Pressure loss coeﬀ., C

Flowrate (g/min) Flowrate (g/min)

Pressure loss coeﬀ., C

0.1 1000mPa・s 0.1

0.01 10 0 mPa・s 0.01

0.001 10 mPa・s 0.001

0.0001 1mPa・s 0.0001

Flowrate (kg/h) Flowrate (kg/h)

CA010 Fig.4.1.1 CA015

0.001 10 mPa・s 0.001

L--740--28--E 0.0001 1mPa・s 0.0001

Flowrate (kg/h) Flowrate (kg/h)

Pressure loss coeﬀ., C

Pressure loss coeﬀ., C

Pressure loss coeﬀ., C

Pressure loss coeﬀ., C

0.01 1000mPa・s 0.01

0.001 10 0 mPa・s 0.001

Flowrate (kg/h) Flowrate (kg/h)

CA080 CA100, CA150

Pressure loss coeﬀ., C

0.01 1000mPa・s 0.01 0.01

6.8 A Boss for Pressure Relief Device - Its Use　 ....................................................................... 52